Power Control for Wireless Communications

ABSTRACT

Wireless communications may be used to support transmission power control. A reference signal may be mapped to a power control parameter set. A message to schedule a transmission may be received that indicates the power control parameter set. A transmission power for the scheduled transmission may be determined based on the reference signal.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims priority to and is a continuation of U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 16/935,968, filed on Jul. 22, 2020, which is acontinuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/935,705 (now U.S.Pat. No. 11,224,021), filed on Jul. 22, 2020, which claims the benefitof U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/877,020, filed on Jul. 22, 2019.Each of the above-referenced applications is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND

A base station and/or a wireless device in a communication networkdetermine and/or adjust transmission powers for signal transmissions.The wireless device uses reference signals, transmitted by the basestation, to determine transmission power for an uplink transmission fromthe wireless device

SUMMARY

The following summary presents a simplified summary of certain features.The summary is not an extensive overview and is not intended to identifykey or critical elements.

Wireless communications may be used to support transmission powercontrol. At least one reference signal may be used by a wireless deviceto determine power for signal transmission. A reference signal may beactivated (e.g., by a base station), from a plurality of referencesignals, for transmission power determination by the wireless device. Areference signal may be indicated in a message comprising updated beaminformation. In the absence of an indication of a reference signal, thewireless device may use a parameter, such as an index of a power controlparameter set, and/or a rule (e.g., lowest index), to determine anassociated reference signal.

These and other features and advantages are described in greater detailbelow.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Some features are shown by way of example, and not by limitation, in theaccompanying drawings. In the drawings, like numerals reference similarelements.

FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B show example communication networks.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane.

FIG. 2B shows an example control plane configuration.

FIG. 3 shows example of protocol layers.

FIG. 4A shows an example downlink data flow for a user planeconfiguration.

FIG. 4B shows an example format of a Medium Access Control (MAC)subheader in a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU).

FIG. 5A shows an example mapping for downlink channels.

FIG. 5B shows an example mapping for uplink channels.

FIG. 6 shows example radio resource control (RRC) states and RRC statetransitions.

FIG. 7 shows an example configuration of a frame.

FIG. 8 shows an example resource configuration of one or more carriers.

FIG. 9 shows an example configuration of bandwidth parts (BWPs).

FIG. 10A shows example carrier aggregation configurations based oncomponent carriers.

FIG. 10B shows example group of cells.

FIG. 11A shows an example mapping of one or more synchronizationsignal/physical broadcast channel (SS/PBCH) blocks.

FIG. 11B shows an example mapping of one or more channel stateinformation reference signals (CSI-RSs).

FIG. 12A shows examples of downlink beam management procedures.

FIG. 12B shows examples of uplink beam management procedures.

FIG. 13A shows an example four-step random access procedure.

FIG. 13B shows an example two-step random access procedure.

FIG. 13C shows an example two-step random access procedure.

FIG. 14A shows an example of control resource set (CORESET)configurations.

FIG. 14B shows an example of a control channel element to resourceelement group (CCE-to-REG) mapping.

FIG. 15A shows an example of communications between a wireless deviceand a base station.

FIG. 15B shows example elements of a computing device that may be usedto implement any of the various devices described herein

FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 16C, and FIG. 16D show examples of uplink anddownlink signal transmission.

FIG. 17 shows an example of a power control configuration for an uplinktransmission.

FIG. 18 shows example communications for transmission power control.

FIG. 19 shows example communications for transmission power control.

FIG. 20 shows an example method for transmission power control.

FIG. 21 shows an example method for transmission power control.

FIG. 22 shows an example method for transmission power control.

FIG. 23 shows example communications for transmission power controlcomprising messaging for updating spatial relation information and/or apower control parameter set.

FIG. 24 shows an example method for transmission power control.

FIG. 25 shows example communications for transmission power controlcomprising messaging for updating spatial relation information and/or apower control parameter set.

FIG. 26 shows an example method for updating a power control parameterset.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The accompanying drawings and descriptions provide examples. It is to beunderstood that the examples shown in the drawings and/or described arenon-exclusive, and that features shown and described may be practiced inother examples. Examples are provided for operation of wirelesscommunication systems, which may be used in the technical field ofmulticarrier communication systems. More particularly, the technologydisclosed herein may relate to determination of signal transmissionpower and/or updating power control parameters to be used for thedetermination.

FIG. 1A shows an example communication network 100. The communicationnetwork 100 may comprise a mobile communication network). Thecommunication network 100 may comprise, for example, a public landmobile network (PLMN) operated/managed/run by a network operator. Thecommunication network 100 may comprise one or more of a core network(CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and/or a wireless device106. The communication network 100 may comprise, and/or a device withinthe communication network 100 may communicate with (e.g., via CN 102),one or more data networks (DN(s)) 108. The wireless device 106 maycommunicate with one or more DNs 108, such as public DNs (e.g., theInternet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. The wireless device106 may communicate with the one or more DNs 108 via the RAN 104 and/orvia the CN 102. The CN 102 may provide/configure the wireless device 106with one or more interfaces to the one or more DNs 108. As part of theinterface functionality, the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connectionsbetween the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs 108,authenticate the wireless device 106, provide/configure chargingfunctionality, etc.

The wireless device 106 may communicate with the RAN 104 via radiocommunications over an air interface. The RAN 104 may communicate withthe CN 102 via various communications (e.g., wired communications and/orwireless communications). The wireless device 106 may establish aconnection with the CN 102 via the RAN 104. The RAN 104 mayprovide/configure scheduling, radio resource management, and/orretransmission protocols, for example, as part of the radiocommunications. The communication direction from the RAN 104 to thewireless device 106 over/via the air interface may be referred to as thedownlink and/or downlink communication direction. The communicationdirection from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over/via the airinterface may be referred to as the uplink and/or uplink communicationdirection. Downlink transmissions may be separated and/or distinguishedfrom uplink transmissions, for example, based on at least one of:frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), anyother duplexing schemes, and/or one or more combinations thereof.

As used throughout, the term “wireless device” may comprise one or moreof: a mobile device, a fixed (e.g., non-mobile) device for whichwireless communication is configured or usable, a computing device, anode, a device capable of wirelessly communicating, or any other devicecapable of sending and/or receiving signals. As non-limiting examples, awireless device may comprise, for example: a telephone, a cellularphone, a Wi-Fi phone, a smartphone, a tablet, a computer, a laptop, asensor, a meter, a wearable device, an Internet of Things (IoT) device,a hotspot, a cellular repeater, a vehicle road side unit (RSU), a relaynode, an automobile, a wireless user device (e.g., user equipment (UE),a user terminal (UT), etc.), an access terminal (AT), a mobile station,a handset, a wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), a wirelesscommunication device, and/or any combination thereof.

The RAN 104 may comprise one or more base stations (not shown). As usedthroughout, the term “base station” may comprise one or more of: a basestation, a node, a Node B (NB), an evolved NodeB (eNB), a gNB, anng-eNB, a relay node (e.g., an integrated access and backhaul (IAB)node), a donor node (e.g., a donor eNB, a donor gNB, etc.), an accesspoint (e.g., a Wi-Fi access point), a transmission and reception point(TRP), a computing device, a device capable of wirelessly communicating,or any other device capable of sending and/or receiving signals. A basestation may comprise one or more of each element listed above. Forexample, a base station may comprise one or more TRPs. As othernon-limiting examples, a base station may comprise for example, one ormore of: a Node B (e.g., associated with Universal MobileTelecommunications System (UMTS) and/or third-generation (3G)standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB) (e.g., associated withEvolved-Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and/orfourth-generation (4G) standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a basebandprocessing unit coupled to one or more remote radio heads (RRHs), arepeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donornode, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B(gNB) (e.g., associated with NR and/or fifth-generation (5G) standards),an access point (AP) (e.g., associated with, for example, Wi-Fi or anyother suitable wireless communication standard), any other generationbase station, and/or any combination thereof. A base station maycomprise one or more devices, such as at least one base station centraldevice (e.g., a gNB Central Unit (gNB-CU)) and at least one base stationdistributed device (e.g., a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU)).

A base station (e.g., in the RAN 104) may comprise one or more sets ofantennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 wirelessly(e.g., via an over the air interface). One or more base stations maycomprise sets (e.g., three sets or any other quantity of sets) ofantennas to respectively control multiple cells or sectors (e.g., threecells, three sectors, any other quantity of cells, or any other quantityof sectors). The size of a cell may be determined by a range at which areceiver (e.g., a base station receiver) may successfully receivetransmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter)operating in the cell. One or more cells of base stations (e.g., byalone or in combination with other cells) may provide/configure a radiocoverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area tosupport wireless device mobility. A base station comprising threesectors (e.g., or n-sector, where n refers to any quantity n) may bereferred to as a three-sector site (e.g., or an n-sector site) or athree-sector base station (e.g., an n-sector base station).

One or more base stations (e.g., in the RAN 104) may be implemented as asectored site with more or less than three sectors. One or more basestations of the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as abaseband processing device/unit coupled to several RRHs, and/or as arepeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a node (e.g.,a donor node). A baseband processing device/unit coupled to RRHs may bepart of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, for example, where thebaseband processing device/unit may be centralized in a pool of basebandprocessing devices/units or virtualized. A repeater node may amplify andsend (e.g., transmit, retransmit, rebroadcast, etc.) a radio signalreceived from a donor node. A relay node may perform the substantiallythe same/similar functions as a repeater node. The relay node may decodethe radio signal received from the donor node, for example, to removenoise before amplifying and sending the radio signal.

The RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of base stations(e.g., macrocell base stations) that have similar antenna patternsand/or similar high-level transmit powers. The RAN 104 may be deployedas a heterogeneous network of base stations (e.g., different basestations that have different antenna patterns). In heterogeneousnetworks, small cell base stations may be used to provide/configuresmall coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap withcomparatively larger coverage areas provided/configured by other basestations (e.g., macrocell base stations). The small coverage areas maybe provided/configured in areas with high data traffic (or so-called“hotspots”) or in areas with a weak macrocell coverage. Examples ofsmall cell base stations may comprise, in order of decreasing coveragearea, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocellbase stations or home base stations.

Examples described herein may be used in a variety of types ofcommunications. For example, communications may be in accordance withthe Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) (e.g., one or morenetwork elements similar to those of the communication network 100),communications in accordance with Institute of Electrical andElectronics Engineers (IEEE), communications in accordance withInternational Telecommunication Union (ITU), communications inaccordance with International Organization for Standardization (ISO),etc. The 3GPP has produced specifications for multiple generations ofmobile networks: a 3G network known as UMTS, a 4G network known asLong-Term Evolution (LTE) and LTE Advanced (LTE-A), and a 5G networkknown as 5G System (5GS) and NR system. 3GPP may produce specificationsfor additional generations of communication networks (e.g., 6G and/orany other generation of communication network). Examples may bedescribed with reference to one or more elements (e.g., the RAN) of a3GPP 5G network, referred to as a next-generation RAN (NG-RAN), or anyother communication network, such as a 3GPP network and/or a non-3GPPnetwork. Examples described herein may be applicable to othercommunication networks, such as 3G and/or 4G networks, and communicationnetworks that may not yet be finalized/specified (e.g., a 3GPP 6Gnetwork), satellite communication networks, and/or any othercommunication network. NG-RAN implements and updates 5G radio accesstechnology referred to as NR and may be provisioned to implement 4Gradio access technology and/or other radio access technologies, such asother 3GPP and/or non-3GPP radio access technologies.

FIG. 1B shows an example communication network 150. The communicationnetwork may comprise a mobile communication network. The communicationnetwork 150 may comprise, for example, a PLMN operated/managed/run by anetwork operator. The communication network 150 may comprise one or moreof: a CN 152 (e.g., a 5G core network (5G-CN)), a RAN 154 (e.g., anNG-RAN), and/or wireless devices 156A and 156B (collectively wirelessdevice(s) 156). The communication network 150 may comprise, and/or adevice within the communication network 150 may communicate with (e.g.,via CN 152), one or more data networks (DN(s)) 170. These components maybe implemented and operate in substantially the same or similar manneras corresponding components described with respect to FIG. 1A.

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may provide/configure the wireless device(s)156 with one or more interfaces to one or more DNs 170, such as publicDNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. Aspart of the interface functionality, the CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may set upend-to-end connections between the wireless device(s) 156 and the one ormore DNs, authenticate the wireless device(s) 156, and/orprovide/configure charging functionality. The CN 152 (e.g., the 5G-CN)may be a service-based architecture, which may differ from other CNs(e.g., such as a 3GPP 4G CN). The architecture of nodes of the CN 152(e.g., 5G-CN) may be defined as network functions that offer servicesvia interfaces to other network functions. The network functions of theCN 152 (e.g., 5G CN) may be implemented in several ways, for example, asnetwork elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instancesrunning on dedicated or shared hardware, and/or as virtualized functionsinstantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform).

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may comprise an Access and Mobility ManagementFunction (AMF) device 158A and/or a User Plane Function (UPF) device158B, which may be separate components or one component AMF/UPF device158. The UPF device 158B may serve as a gateway between a RAN 154 (e.g.,NG-RAN) and the one or more DNs 170. The UPF device 158B may performfunctions, such as: packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection anduser plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplinkclassification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or moreDNs 170, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g.,packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplinktraffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and/or downlink datanotification triggering. The UPF device 158B may serve as an anchorpoint for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, anexternal protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point ofinterconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to supporta multi-homed PDU session. The wireless device(s) 156 may be configuredto receive services via a PDU session, which may be a logical connectionbetween a wireless device and a DN.

The AMF device 158A may perform functions, such as: Non-Access Stratum(NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS)security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between accessnetworks (e.g., 3GPP access networks and/or non-3GPP networks), idlemode wireless device reachability (e.g., idle mode UE reachability forcontrol and execution of paging retransmission), registration areamanagement, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, accessauthentication, access authorization including checking of roamingrights, mobility management control (e.g., subscription and policies),network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF)selection. NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a CN anda wireless device, and AS may refer to the functionality operatingbetween a wireless device and a RAN.

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may comprise one or more additional networkfunctions that may not be shown in FIG. 1B. The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) maycomprise one or more devices implementing at least one of: a SessionManagement Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a PolicyControl Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a UnifiedData Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), an AuthenticationServer Function (AUSF), and/or any other function.

The RAN 154 (e.g., NG-RAN) may communicate with the wireless device(s)156 via radio communications (e.g., an over the air interface). Thewireless device(s) 156 may communicate with the CN 152 via the RAN 154.The RAN 154 (e.g., NG-RAN) may comprise one or more first-type basestations (e.g., gNBs comprising a gNB 160A and a gNB 160B (collectivelygNBs 160)) and/or one or more second-type base stations (e.g., ng eNBscomprising an ng-eNB 162A and an ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng eNBs162)). The RAN 154 may comprise one or more of any quantity of types ofbase station. The gNBs 160 and ng eNBs 162 may be referred to as basestations. The base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and ng eNBs 162) maycomprise one or more sets of antennas for communicating with thewireless device(s) 156 wirelessly (e.g., an over an air interface). Oneor more base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng eNBs 162) maycomprise multiple sets of antennas to respectively control multiplecells (or sectors). The cells of the base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160and the ng-eNBs 162) may provide a radio coverage to the wirelessdevice(s) 156 over a wide geographic area to support wireless devicemobility.

The base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162) may beconnected to the CN 152 (e.g., 5G CN) via a first interface (e.g., an NGinterface) and to other base stations via a second interface (e.g., anXn interface). The NG and Xn interfaces may be established using directphysical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlyingtransport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network.The base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162) maycommunicate with the wireless device(s) 156 via a third interface (e.g.,a Uu interface). A base station (e.g., the gNB 160A) may communicatewith the wireless device 156A via a Uu interface. The NG, Xn, and Uuinterfaces may be associated with a protocol stack. The protocol stacksassociated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements shownin FIG. 1B to exchange data and signaling messages. The protocol stacksmay comprise two planes: a user plane and a control plane. Any otherquantity of planes may be used (e.g., in a protocol stack). The userplane may handle data of interest to a user. The control plane mayhandle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.

One or more base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162)may communicate with one or more AMF/UPF devices, such as the AMF/UPF158, via one or more interfaces (e.g., NG interfaces). A base station(e.g., the gNB 160A) may be in communication with, and/or connected to,the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 via an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface.The NG-U interface may provide/perform delivery (e.g., non-guaranteeddelivery) of user plane PDUs between a base station (e.g., the gNB 160A)and a UPF device (e.g., the UPF 158B). The base station (e.g., the gNB160A) may be in communication with, and/or connected to, an AMF device(e.g., the AMF 158A) via an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface. The NG-Cinterface may provide/perform, for example, NG interface management,wireless device context management (e.g., UE context management),wireless device mobility management (e.g., UE mobility management),transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, configurationtransfer, and/or warning message transmission.

A wireless device may access the base station, via an interface (e.g.,Uu interface), for the user plane configuration and the control planeconfiguration. The base stations (e.g., gNBs 160) may provide user planeand control plane protocol terminations towards the wireless device(s)156 via the Uu interface. A base station (e.g., the gNB 160A) mayprovide user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward thewireless device 156A over a Uu interface associated with a firstprotocol stack. A base station (e.g., the ng-eNBs 162) may provideEvolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E UTRA) user plane and controlplane protocol terminations towards the wireless device(s) 156 via a Uuinterface (e.g., where E UTRA may refer to the 3GPP 4G radio-accesstechnology). A base station (e.g., the ng-eNB 162B) may provide E UTRAuser plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the wirelessdevice 156B via a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack.The user plane and control plane protocol terminations may comprise, forexample, NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations, 4G userplane and control plane protocol terminations, etc.

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may be configured to handle one or more radioaccesses (e.g., NR, 4G, and/or any other radio accesses). It may also bepossible for an NR network/device (or any first network/device) toconnect to a 4G core network/device (or any second network/device) in anon-standalone mode (e.g., non-standalone operation). In anon-standalone mode/operation, a 4G core network may be used to provide(or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g., initial access,mobility, and/or paging). Although only one AMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG.1B, one or more base stations (e.g., one or more gNBs and/or one or moreng-eNBs) may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes, for example, toprovide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPFnodes.

An interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and/or NG interfaces) between networkelements (e.g., the network elements shown in FIG. 1B) may be associatedwith a protocol stack that the network elements may use to exchange dataand signaling messages. A protocol stack may comprise two planes: a userplane and a control plane. Any other quantity of planes may be used(e.g., in a protocol stack). The user plane may handle data associatedwith a user (e.g., data of interest to a user). The control plane mayhandle data associated with one or more network elements (e.g.,signaling messages of interest to the network elements).

The communication network 100 in FIG. 1A and/or the communicationnetwork 150 in FIG. 1B may comprise any quantity/number and/or type ofdevices, such as, for example, computing devices, wireless devices,mobile devices, handsets, tablets, laptops, internet of things (IoT)devices, hotspots, cellular repeaters, computing devices, and/or, moregenerally, user equipment (e.g., UE). Although one or more of the abovetypes of devices may be referenced herein (e.g., UE, wireless device,computing device, etc.), it should be understood that any device hereinmay comprise any one or more of the above types of devices or similardevices. The communication network, and any other network referencedherein, may comprise an LTE network, a 5G network, a satellite network,and/or any other network for wireless communications (e.g., any 3GPPnetwork and/or any non-3GPP network). Apparatuses, systems, and/ormethods described herein may generally be described as implemented onone or more devices (e.g., wireless device, base station, eNB, gNB,computing device, etc.), in one or more networks, but it will beunderstood that one or more features and steps may be implemented on anydevice and/or in any network.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane configuration. The user planeconfiguration may comprise, for example, an NR user plane protocolstack. FIG. 2B shows an example control plane configuration. The controlplane configuration may comprise, for example, an NR control planeprotocol stack. One or more of the user plane configuration and/or thecontrol plane configuration may use a Uu interface that may be between awireless device 210 and a base station 220. The protocol stacks shown inFIG. 2A and FIG. 2B may be substantially the same or similar to thoseused for the Uu interface between, for example, the wireless device 156Aand the base station 160A shown in FIG. 1B.

A user plane configuration (e.g., an NR user plane protocol stack) maycomprise multiple layers (e.g., five layers or any other quantity oflayers) implemented in the wireless device 210 and the base station 220(e.g., as shown in FIG. 2A). At the bottom of the protocol stack,physical layers (PHYs) 211 and 221 may provide transport services to thehigher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of theOpen Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The protocol layers above PHY211 may comprise a medium access control layer (MAC) 212, a radio linkcontrol layer (RLC) 213, a packet data convergence protocol layer (PDCP)214, and/or a service data application protocol layer (SDAP) 215. Theprotocol layers above PHY 221 may comprise a medium access control layer(MAC) 222, a radio link control layer (RLC) 223, a packet dataconvergence protocol layer (PDCP) 224, and/or a service data applicationprotocol layer (SDAP) 225. One or more of the four protocol layers abovePHY 211 may correspond to layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSImodel. One or more of the four protocol layers above PHY 221 maycorrespond to layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model.

FIG. 3 shows an example of protocol layers. The protocol layers maycomprise, for example, protocol layers of the NR user plane protocolstack. One or more services may be provided between protocol layers.SDAPs (e.g., SDAPS 215 and 225 shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 3) may performQuality of Service (QoS) flow handling. A wireless device (e.g., thewireless devices 106, 156A, 156B, and 210) may receive servicesthrough/via a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between thewireless device and a DN. The PDU session may have one or more QoS flows310. A UPF (e.g., the UPF 158B) of a CN may map IP packets to the one ormore QoS flows of the PDU session, for example, based on one or more QoSrequirements (e.g., in terms of delay, data rate, error rate, and/or anyother quality/service requirement). The SDAPs 215 and 225 may performmapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows 310 and one or moreradio bearers 320 (e.g., data radio bearers). The mapping/de-mappingbetween the one or more QoS flows 310 and the radio bearers 320 may bedetermined by the SDAP 225 of the base station 220. The SDAP 215 of thewireless device 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows310 and the radio bearers 320 via reflective mapping and/or controlsignaling received from the base station 220. For reflective mapping,the SDAP 225 of the base station 220 may mark the downlink packets witha QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may bemonitored/detected/identified/indicated/observed by the SDAP 215 of thewireless device 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the oneor more QoS flows 310 and the radio bearers 320.

PDCPs (e.g., the PDCPs 214 and 224 shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 3) mayperform header compression/decompression, for example, to reduce theamount of data that may need to be transmitted over the air interface,ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of datatransmitted over the air interface, and/or integrity protection (e.g.,to ensure control messages originate from intended sources). The PDCPs214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets,in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and/or removal ofpackets received in duplicate due to, for example, a handover (e.g., anintra-gNB handover). The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packetduplication, for example, to improve the likelihood of the packet beingreceived. A receiver may receive the packet in duplicate and may removeany duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for certainservices, such as services that require high reliability.

The PDCP layers (e.g., PDCPs 214 and 224) may perform mapping/de-mappingbetween a split radio bearer and RLC channels (e.g., RLC channels 330)(e.g., in a dual connectivity scenario/configuration). Dual connectivitymay refer to a technique that allows a wireless device to communicatewith multiple cells (e.g., two cells) or, more generally, multiple cellgroups comprising: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group(SCG). A split bearer may be configured and/or used, for example, if asingle radio bearer (e.g., such as one of the radio bearersprovided/configured by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs215 and 225) is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity. The PDCPs214 and 224 may map/de-map between the split radio bearer and RLCchannels 330 belonging to the cell groups.

RLC layers (e.g., RLCs 213 and 223) may perform segmentation,retransmission via Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and/or removal ofduplicate data units received from MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222,respectively). The RLC layers (e.g., RLCs 213 and 223) may supportmultiple transmission modes (e.g., three transmission modes: transparentmode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM)). TheRLC layers may perform one or more of the noted functions, for example,based on the transmission mode an RLC layer is operating. The RLCconfiguration may be per logical channel. The RLC configuration may notdepend on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations(or other durations). The RLC layers (e.g., RLCs 213 and 223) mayprovide/configure RLC channels as a service to the PDCP layers (e.g.,PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively), such as shown in FIG. 3.

The MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222) may performmultiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping betweenlogical channels and transport channels. The multiplexing/demultiplexingmay comprise multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units/data portions,belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from TransportBlocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHY layers (e.g., PHYs 211 and 221,respectively). The MAC layer of a base station (e.g., MAC 222) may beconfigured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting,and/or priority handling between wireless devices via dynamicscheduling. Scheduling may be performed by a base station (e.g., thebase station 220 at the MAC 222) for downlink/or and uplink. The MAClayers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222) may be configured to perform errorcorrection(s) via Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQentity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priorityhandling between logical channels of the wireless device 210 via logicalchannel prioritization and/or padding. The MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212and 222) may support one or more numerologies and/or transmissiontimings. Mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization maycontrol which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channelmay use. The MAC layers (e.g., the MACs 212 and 222) mayprovide/configure logical channels 340 as a service to the RLC layers(e.g., the RLCs 213 and 223).

The PHY layers (e.g., PHYs 211 and 221) may perform mapping of transportchannels to physical channels and/or digital and analog signalprocessing functions, for example, for sending and/or receivinginformation (e.g., via an over the air interface). The digital and/oranalog signal processing functions may comprise, for example,coding/decoding and/or modulation/demodulation. The PHY layers (e.g.,PHYs 211 and 221) may perform multi-antenna mapping. The PHY layers(e.g., the PHYs 211 and 221) may provide/configure one or more transportchannels (e.g., transport channels 350) as a service to the MAC layers(e.g., the MACs 212 and 222, respectively).

FIG. 4A shows an example downlink data flow for a user planeconfiguration. The user plane configuration may comprise, for example,the NR user plane protocol stack shown in FIG. 2A. One or more TBs maybe generated, for example, based on a data flow via a user planeprotocol stack. As shown in FIG. 4A, a downlink data flow of three IPpackets (n, n+1, and m) via the NR user plane protocol stack maygenerate two TBs (e.g., at the base station 220). An uplink data flowvia the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink dataflow shown in FIG. 4A. The three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) may bedetermined from the two TBs, for example, based on the uplink data flowvia an NR user plane protocol stack. A first quantity of packets (e.g.,three or any other quantity) may be determined from a second quantity ofTBs (e.g., two or another quantity).

The downlink data flow may begin, for example, if the SDAP 225 receivesthe three IP packets (or other quantity of IP packets) from one or moreQoS flows and maps the three packets (or other quantity of packets) toradio bearers (e.g., radio bearers 402 and 404). The SDAP 225 may mapthe IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and map the IPpacket m to a second radio bearer 404. An SDAP header (labeled with “H”preceding each SDAP SDU shown in FIG. 4A) may be added to an IP packetto generate an SDAP PDU, which may be referred to as a PDCP SDU. Thedata unit transferred from/to a higher protocol layer may be referred toas a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer, and the dataunit transferred to/from a lower protocol layer may be referred to as aprotocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer. As shown in FIG.4A, the data unit from the SDAP 225 may be an SDU of lower protocollayer PDCP 224 (e.g., PDCP SDU) and may be a PDU of the SDAP 225 (e.g.,SDAP PDU).

Each protocol layer (e.g., protocol layers shown in FIG. 4A) or at leastsome protocol layers may: perform its own function(s) (e.g., one or morefunctions of each protocol layer described with respect to FIG. 3), adda corresponding header, and/or forward a respective output to the nextlower layer (e.g., its respective lower layer). The PDCP 224 may performan IP-header compression and/or ciphering. The PDCP 224 may forward itsoutput (e.g., a PDCP PDU, which is an RLC SDU) to the RLC 223. The RLC223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet min FIG. 4A). The RLC 223 may forward its outputs (e.g., two RLC PDUs,which are two MAC SDUs, generated by adding respective subheaders to twoSDU segments (SDU Segs)) to the MAC 222. The MAC 222 may multiplex anumber of RLC PDUs (MAC SDUs). The MAC 222 may attach a MAC subheader toan RLC PDU (MAC SDU) to form a TB. The MAC subheaders may be distributedacross the MAC PDU (e.g., in an NR configuration as shown in FIG. 4A).The MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of a MAC PDU(e.g., in an LTE configuration). The NR MAC PDU structure may reduce aprocessing time and/or associated latency, for example, if the MAC PDUsubheaders are computed before assembling the full MAC PDU.

FIG. 4B shows an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU. A MACPDU may comprise a MAC subheader (H) and a MAC SDU. Each of one or moreMAC subheaders may comprise an SDU length field for indicating thelength (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheadercorresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field foridentifying/indicating the logical channel from which the MAC SDUoriginated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) forindicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R)field for future use.

One or more MAC control elements (CEs) may be added to, or insertedinto, the MAC PDU by a MAC layer, such as MAC 223 or MAC 222. As shownin FIG. 4B, two MAC CEs may be inserted/added before two MAC PDUs. TheMAC CEs may be inserted/added at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlinktransmissions (as shown in FIG. 4B). One or more MAC CEs may beinserted/added at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions. MAC CEsmay be used for in band control signaling. Example MAC CEs may comprisescheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and powerheadroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs (e.g., MAC CEs foractivation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel stateinformation (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS)transmission, and prior configured components); discontinuous reception(DRX)-related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access-relatedMAC CEs. A MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similarformat as described for the MAC subheader for MAC SDUs and may beidentified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates thetype of control information included in the corresponding MAC CE.

FIG. 5A shows an example mapping for downlink channels. The mapping foruplink channels may comprise mapping between channels (e.g., logicalchannels, transport channels, and physical channels) for downlink. FIG.5B shows an example mapping for uplink channels. The mapping for uplinkchannels may comprise mapping between channels (e.g., logical channels,transport channels, and physical channels) for uplink. Information maybe passed through/via channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHYlayers of a protocol stack (e.g., the NR protocol stack). A logicalchannel may be used between the RLC and the MAC layers. The logicalchannel may be classified/indicated as a control channel that may carrycontrol and/or configuration information (e.g., in the NR controlplane), or as a traffic channel that may carry data (e.g., in the NRuser plane). A logical channel may be classified/indicated as adedicated logical channel that may be dedicated to a specific wirelessdevice, and/or as a common logical channel that may be used by more thanone wireless device (e.g., a group of wireless device).

A logical channel may be defined by the type of information it carries.The set of logical channels (e.g., in an NR configuration) may compriseone or more channels described below. A paging control channel (PCCH)may comprise/carry one or more paging messages used to page a wirelessdevice whose location is not known to the network on a cell level. Abroadcast control channel (BCCH) may comprise/carry system informationmessages in the form of a master information block (MIB) and severalsystem information blocks (SIBs). The system information messages may beused by wireless devices to obtain information about how a cell isconfigured and how to operate within the cell. A common control channel(CCCH) may comprise/carry control messages together with random access.A dedicated control channel (DCCH) may comprise/carry control messagesto/from a specific wireless device to configure the wireless device withconfiguration information. A dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) maycomprise/carry user data to/from a specific wireless device.

Transport channels may be used between the MAC and PHY layers. Transportchannels may be defined by how the information they carry issent/transmitted (e.g., via an over the air interface). The set oftransport channels (e.g., that may be defined by an NR configuration orany other configuration) may comprise one or more of the followingchannels. A paging channel (PCH) may comprise/carry paging messages thatoriginated from the PCCH. A broadcast channel (BCH) may comprise/carrythe MIB from the BCCH. A downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) maycomprise/carry downlink data and signaling messages, including the SIBsfrom the BCCH. An uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) may comprise/carryuplink data and signaling messages. A random access channel (RACH) mayprovide a wireless device with an access to the network without anyprior scheduling.

The PHY layer may use physical channels to pass/transfer informationbetween processing levels of the PHY layer. A physical channel may havean associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying theinformation of one or more transport channels. The PHY layer maygenerate control information to support the low-level operation of thePHY layer. The PHY layer may provide/transfer the control information tothe lower levels of the PHY layer via physical control channels (e.g.,referred to as L1/L2 control channels). The set of physical channels andphysical control channels (e.g., that may be defined by an NRconfiguration or any other configuration) may comprise one or more ofthe following channels. A physical broadcast channel (PBCH) maycomprise/carry the MIB from the BCH. A physical downlink shared channel(PDSCH) may comprise/carry downlink data and signaling messages from theDL-SCH, as well as paging messages from the PCH. A physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) may comprise/carry downlink control information(DCI), which may comprise downlink scheduling commands, uplinkscheduling grants, and uplink power control commands A physical uplinkshared channel (PUSCH) may comprise/carry uplink data and signalingmessages from the UL-SCH and in some instances uplink controlinformation (UCI) as described below. A physical uplink control channel(PUCCH) may comprise/carry UCI, which may comprise HARQ acknowledgments,channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI),rank indicators (RI), and scheduling requests (SR). A physical randomaccess channel (PRACH) may be used for random access.

The physical layer may generate physical signals to support thelow-level operation of the physical layer, which may be similar to thephysical control channels. As shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B, the physicallayer signals (e.g., that may be defined by an NR configuration or anyother configuration) may comprise primary synchronization signals (PSS),secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state informationreference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DM-RS),sounding reference signals (SRS), phase-tracking reference signals (PTRS), and/or any other signals.

One or more of the channels (e.g., logical channels, transport channels,physical channels, etc.) may be used to carry out functions associatedwith the control plan protocol stack (e.g., NR control plane protocolstack). FIG. 2B shows an example control plane configuration (e.g., anNR control plane protocol stack). As shown in FIG. 2B, the control planeconfiguration (e.g., the NR control plane protocol stack) may usesubstantially the same/similar one or more protocol layers (e.g., PHY211 and 221, MAC 212 and 222, RLC 213 and 223, and PDCP 214 and 224) asthe example user plane configuration (e.g., the NR user plane protocolstack). Similar four protocol layers may comprise the PHYs 211 and 221,the MACs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224.The control plane configuration (e.g., the NR control plane stack) mayhave radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217and 237 at the top of the control plane configuration (e.g., the NRcontrol plane protocol stack), for example, instead of having the SDAPs215 and 225. The control plane configuration may comprise an AMF 230comprising the NAS protocol 237.

The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionalitybetween the wireless device 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A orany other AMF) and/or, more generally, between the wireless device 210and a CN (e.g., the CN 152 or any other CN). The NAS protocols 217 and237 may provide control plane functionality between the wireless device210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages.There may be no direct path between the wireless device 210 and the AMF230 via which the NAS messages may be transported. The NAS messages maybe transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces. The NASprotocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality, such asauthentication, security, a connection setup, mobility management,session management, and/or any other functionality.

The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide/configure control plane functionalitybetween the wireless device 210 and the base station 220 and/or, moregenerally, between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., the basestation 220). The RRC layers 216 and 226 may provide/configure controlplane functionality between the wireless device 210 and the base station220 via signaling messages, which may be referred to as RRC messages.The RRC messages may be transmitted between the wireless device 210 andthe RAN (e.g., the base station 220) using signaling radio bearers andthe same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers. The MAC layermay multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same TB. TheRRC layers 216 and 226 may provide/configure control planefunctionality, such as one or more of the following functionalities:broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiatedby the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRCconnection between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., the basestation 220); security functions including key management;establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radiobearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS managementfunctions; wireless device measurement reporting (e.g., the wirelessdevice measurement reporting) and control of the reporting; detection ofand recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer.As part of establishing an RRC connection, RRC layers 216 and 226 mayestablish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters forcommunication between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., thebase station 220).

FIG. 6 shows example RRC states and RRC state transitions. An RRC stateof a wireless device may be changed to another RRC state (e.g., RRCstate transitions of a wireless device). The wireless device may besubstantially the same or similar to the wireless device 106, 210, orany other wireless device. A wireless device may be in at least one of aplurality of states, such as three RRC states comprising RRC connected602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 606 (e.g., RRC_IDLE), and RRCinactive 604 (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE). The RRC inactive 604 may be RRCconnected but inactive.

An RRC connection may be established for the wireless device. Forexample, this may be during an RRC connected state. During the RRCconnected state (e.g., during the RRC connected 602), the wirelessdevice may have an established RRC context and may have at least one RRCconnection with a base station. The base station may be similar to oneof the one or more base stations (e.g., one or more base stations of theRAN 104 shown in FIG. 1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 shown inFIG. 1B, the base station 220 shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any otherbase stations). The base station with which the wireless device isconnected (e.g., has established an RRC connection) may have the RRCcontext for the wireless device. The RRC context, which may be referredto as a wireless device context (e.g., the UE context), may compriseparameters for communication between the wireless device and the basestation. These parameters may comprise, for example, one or more of: AScontexts; radio link configuration parameters; bearer configurationinformation (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, a signaling radiobearer, a logical channel, a QoS flow, and/or a PDU session); securityinformation; and/or layer configuration information (e.g., PHY, MAC,RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information). During the RRCconnected state (e.g., the RRC connected 602), mobility of the wirelessdevice may be managed/controlled by an RAN (e.g., the RAN 104 or the NGRAN 154). The wireless device may measure received signal levels (e.g.,reference signal levels, reference signal received power, referencesignal received quality, received signal strength indicator, etc.) basedon one or more signals sent from a serving cell and neighboring cells.The wireless device may report these measurements to a serving basestation (e.g., the base station currently serving the wireless device).The serving base station of the wireless device may request a handoverto a cell of one of the neighboring base stations, for example, based onthe reported measurements. The RRC state may transition from the RRCconnected state (e.g., RRC connected 602) to an RRC idle state (e.g.,the RRC idle 606) via a connection release procedure 608. The RRC statemay transition from the RRC connected state (e.g., RRC connected 602) tothe RRC inactive state (e.g., RRC inactive 604) via a connectioninactivation procedure 610.

An RRC context may not be established for the wireless device. Forexample, this may be during the RRC idle state. During the RRC idlestate (e.g., the RRC idle 606), an RRC context may not be establishedfor the wireless device. During the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle606), the wireless device may not have an RRC connection with the basestation. During the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606), thewireless device may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time(e.g., to conserve battery power). The wireless device may wake upperiodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle)to monitor for paging messages (e.g., paging messages set from the RAN).Mobility of the wireless device may be managed by the wireless devicevia a procedure of a cell reselection. The RRC state may transition fromthe RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) to the RRC connected state(e.g., the RRC connected 602) via a connection establishment procedure612, which may involve a random access procedure.

A previously established RRC context may be maintained for the wirelessdevice. For example, this may be during the RRC inactive state. Duringthe RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), the RRC contextpreviously established may be maintained in the wireless device and thebase station. The maintenance of the RRC context may enable/allow a fasttransition to the RRC connected state (e.g., the RRC connected 602) withreduced signaling overhead as compared to the transition from the RRCidle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) to the RRC connected state (e.g.,the RRC connected 602). During the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRCinactive 604), the wireless device may be in a sleep state and mobilityof the wireless device may be managed/controlled by the wireless devicevia a cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from the RRCinactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) to the RRC connected state(e.g., the RRC connected 602) via a connection resume procedure 614. TheRRC state may transition from the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRCinactive 604) to the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) via aconnection release procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar toconnection release procedure 608.

An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism.During the RRC idle state (e.g., RRC idle 606) and the RRC inactivestate (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), mobility may be managed/controlledby the wireless device via a cell reselection. The purpose of mobilitymanagement during the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) or duringthe RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) may be toenable/allow the network to be able to notify the wireless device of anevent via a paging message without having to broadcast the pagingmessage over the entire mobile communications network. The mobilitymanagement mechanism used during the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle606) or during the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) mayenable/allow the network to track the wireless device on a cell-grouplevel, for example, so that the paging message may be broadcast over thecells of the cell group that the wireless device currently resideswithin (e.g. instead of sending the paging message over the entiremobile communication network). The mobility management mechanisms forthe RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) and the RRC inactive state(e.g., the RRC inactive 604) may track the wireless device on acell-group level. The mobility management mechanisms may do thetracking, for example, using different granularities of grouping. Theremay be a plurality of levels of cell-grouping granularity (e.g., threelevels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within aRAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within agroup of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by atracking area identifier (TAI)).

Tracking areas may be used to track the wireless device (e.g., trackingthe location of the wireless device at the CN level). The CN (e.g., theCN 102, the 5G CN 152, or any other CN) may send to the wireless devicea list of TAIs associated with a wireless device registration area(e.g., a UE registration area). A wireless device may perform aregistration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the locationof the wireless device and provide the wireless device with a new the UEregistration area, for example, if the wireless device moves (e.g., viaa cell reselection) to a cell associated with a TAI that may not beincluded in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area.

RAN areas may be used to track the wireless device (e.g., the locationof the wireless device at the RAN level). For a wireless device in anRRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), the wireless device maybe assigned/provided/configured with a RAN notification area. A RANnotification area may comprise one or more cell identities (e.g., a listof RAIs and/or a list of TAIs). A base station may belong to one or moreRAN notification areas. A cell may belong to one or more RANnotification areas. A wireless device may perform a notification areaupdate with the RAN to update the RAN notification area of the wirelessdevice, for example, if the wireless device moves (e.g., via a cellreselection) to a cell not included in the RAN notification areaassigned/provided/configured to the wireless device.

A base station storing an RRC context for a wireless device or a lastserving base station of the wireless device may be referred to as ananchor base station. An anchor base station may maintain an RRC contextfor the wireless device at least during a period of time that thewireless device stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor basestation and/or during a period of time that the wireless device stays inan RRC inactive state (e.g., RRC inactive 604).

A base station (e.g., gNBs 160 in FIG. 1B or any other base station) maybe split in two parts: a central unit (e.g., a base station centralunit, such as a gNB CU) and one or more distributed units (e.g., a basestation distributed unit, such as a gNB DU). A base station central unit(CU) may be coupled to one or more base station distributed units (DUs)using an F1 interface (e.g., an F1 interface defined in an NRconfiguration). The base station CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, andthe SDAP layers. A base station distributed unit (DU) may comprise theRLC, the MAC, and the PHY layers.

The physical signals and physical channels (e.g., described with respectto FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) may be mapped onto one or more symbols (e.g.,orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols in an NRconfiguration or any other symbols). OFDM is a multicarriercommunication scheme that transmits data over F orthogonal subcarriers(or tones). The data may be mapped to a series of complex symbols (e.g.,M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) symbols or M-phase shiftkeying (M PSK) symbols or any other modulated symbols), referred to assource symbols, and divided into F parallel symbol streams, for example,before transmission of the data. The F parallel symbol streams may betreated as if they are in the frequency domain. The F parallel symbolsmay be used as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) blockthat transforms them into the time domain. The IFFT block may take in Fsource symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbolstreams. The IFFT block may use each source symbol to modulate theamplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functions thatcorrespond to the F orthogonal subcarriers. The output of the IFFT blockmay be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the Forthogonal subcarriers. The F time-domain samples may form a single OFDMsymbol. An OFDM symbol provided/output by the IFFT block may besent/transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency, forexample, after one or more processes (e.g., addition of a cyclic prefix)and up-conversion. The F parallel symbol streams may be mixed, forexample, using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) block before beingprocessed by the IFFT block. This operation may produce Discrete FourierTransform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by one or morewireless devices in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio(PAPR). Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at areceiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the sourcesymbols.

FIG. 7 shows an example configuration of a frame. The frame maycomprise, for example, an NR radio frame into which OFDM symbols may begrouped. A frame (e.g., an NR radio frame) may be identified/indicatedby a system frame number (SFN) or any other value. The SFN may repeatwith a period of 1024 frames. One NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms)in duration and may comprise 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration. Asubframe may be divided into one or more slots (e.g., depending onnumerologies and/or different subcarrier spacings). Each of the one ormore slots may comprise, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot. Anyquantity of symbols, slots, or duration may be used for any timeinterval.

The duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDMsymbols of the slot. A flexible numerology may be supported, forexample, to accommodate different deployments (e.g., cells with carrierfrequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in themm-wave range). A flexible numerology may be supported, for example, inan NR configuration or any other radio configurations. A numerology maybe defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and/or cyclic prefix duration.Subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baselinesubcarrier spacing of 15 kHz. Cyclic prefix durations may be scaled downby powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 μs, forexample, for a numerology in an NR configuration or any other radioconfigurations. Numerologies may be defined with the followingsubcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 μs;30 kHz/2.3 μs; 60 kHz/1.2 μs; 120 kHz/0.59 μs; 240 kHz/0.29 μs, and/orany other subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations.

A slot may have a fixed number/quantity of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDMsymbols). A numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing may have ashorter slot duration and more slots per subframe. Examples ofnumerology-dependent slot duration and slots-per-subframe transmissionstructure are shown in FIG. 7 (the numerology with a subcarrier spacingof 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7). A subframe (e.g., in an NRconfiguration) may be used as a numerology-independent time reference. Aslot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlinktransmissions are scheduled. Scheduling (e.g., in an NR configuration)may be decoupled from the slot duration. Scheduling may start at anyOFDM symbol. Scheduling may last for as many symbols as needed for atransmission, for example, to support low latency. These partial slottransmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or sub-slot transmissions.

FIG. 8 shows an example resource configuration of one or more carriers.The resource configuration of may comprise a slot in the time andfrequency domain for an NR carrier or any other carrier. The slot maycomprise resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs). A resourceelement (RE) may be the smallest physical resource (e.g., in an NRconfiguration). An RE may span one OFDM symbol in the time domain by onesubcarrier in the frequency domain, such as shown in FIG. 8. An RB mayspan twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain, such as shown inFIG. 8. A carrier (e.g., an NR carrier) may be limited to a width of acertain quantity of RBs and/or subcarriers (e.g., 275 RBs or 275×12=3300subcarriers). Such limitation(s), if used, may limit the carrier (e.g.,NR carrier) frequency based on subcarrier spacing (e.g., carrierfrequency of 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15,30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively). A 400 MHz bandwidth may be set basedon a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit. Any other bandwidth may be setbased on a per carrier bandwidth limit.

A single numerology may be used across the entire bandwidth of a carrier(e.g., an NR such as shown in FIG. 8). In other example configurations,multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier. NR and/orother access technologies may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., upto 400 MHz for a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all wirelessdevices may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g., due tohardware limitations and/or different wireless device capabilities).Receiving and/or utilizing the full carrier bandwidth may beprohibitive, for example, in terms of wireless device power consumption.A wireless device may adapt the size of the receive bandwidth of thewireless device, for example, based on the amount of traffic thewireless device is scheduled to receive (e.g., to reduce powerconsumption and/or for other purposes). Such an adaptation may bereferred to as bandwidth adaptation.

Configuration of one or more bandwidth parts (BWPs) may support one ormore wireless devices not capable of receiving the full carrierbandwidth. BWPs may support bandwidth adaptation, for example, for suchwireless devices not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth. ABWP (e.g., a BWP of an NR configuration) may be defined by a subset ofcontiguous RBs on a carrier. A wireless device may be configured (e.g.,via an RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs per serving cell andone or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPsper serving cell and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell). One ormore of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active, forexample, at a given time. The one or more BWPs may be referred to asactive BWPs of the serving cell. A serving cell may have one or morefirst active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second activeBWPs in the secondary uplink carrier, for example, if the serving cellis configured with a secondary uplink carrier.

A downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked withan uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs (e.g., for unpairedspectra). A downlink BWP and an uplink BWP may be linked, for example,if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index ofthe uplink BWP are the same. A wireless device may expect that thecenter frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as the center frequencyfor an uplink BWP (e.g., for unpaired spectra).

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more controlresource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space. The base stationmay configure the wireless device with one or more CORESTS, for example,for a downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs on a primarycell (PCell) or on a secondary cell (SCell). A search space may comprisea set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the wirelessdevice may monitor/find/detect/identify control information. The searchspace may be a wireless device-specific search space (e.g., aUE-specific search space) or a common search space (e.g., potentiallyusable by a plurality of wireless devices or a group of wireless userdevices). A base station may configure a group of wireless devices witha common search space, on a PCell or on a primary secondary cell(PSCell), in an active downlink BWP.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more resourcesets for one or more PUCCH transmissions, for example, for an uplink BWPin a set of configured uplink BWPs. A wireless device may receivedownlink receptions (e.g., PDCCH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP, forexample, according to a configured numerology (e.g., a configuredsubcarrier spacing and/or a configured cyclic prefix duration) for thedownlink BWP. The wireless device may send/transmit uplink transmissions(e.g., PUCCH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP, for example, according to aconfigured numerology (e.g., a configured subcarrier spacing and/or aconfigured cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).

One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided/comprised in DownlinkControl Information (DCI). A value of a BWP indicator field may indicatewhich BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for oneor more downlink receptions. The value of the one or more BWP indicatorfields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplinktransmissions.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with adefault downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associatedwith a PCell. A default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlinkBWP, for example, if the base station does not provide/configure adefault downlink BWP to/for the wireless device. The wireless device maydetermine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP, for example,based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a BWP inactivitytimer value for a PCell. The wireless device may start or restart a BWPinactivity timer at any appropriate time. The wireless device may startor restart the BWP inactivity timer, for example, if one or moreconditions are satisfied. The one or more conditions may comprise atleast one of: the wireless device detects DCI indicating an activedownlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectraoperation; the wireless device detects DCI indicating an active downlinkBWP other than a default downlink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation;and/or the wireless device detects DCI indicating an active uplink BWPother than a default uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation. Thewireless device may start/run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration(e.g., increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, ordecrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero), for example, ifthe wireless device does not detect DCI during a time interval (e.g., 1ms or 0.5 ms). The wireless device may switch from the active downlinkBWP to the default downlink BWP, for example, if the BWP inactivitytimer expires.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with oneor more BWPs. A wireless device may switch an active BWP from a firstBWP to a second BWP, for example, after or in response to receiving DCIindicating the second BWP as an active BWP. A wireless device may switchan active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP, for example, after or inresponse to an expiry of the BWP inactivity timer (e.g., if the secondBWP is the default BWP).

A downlink BWP switching may refer to switching an active downlink BWPfrom a first downlink BWP to a second downlink BWP (e.g., the seconddownlink BWP is activated and the first downlink BWP is deactivated). Anuplink BWP switching may refer to switching an active uplink BWP from afirst uplink BWP to a second uplink BWP (e.g., the second uplink BWP isactivated and the first uplink BWP is deactivated). Downlink and uplinkBWP switching may be performed independently (e.g., in pairedspectrum/spectra). Downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performedsimultaneously (e.g., in unpaired spectrum/spectra). Switching betweenconfigured BWPs may occur, for example, based on RRC signaling, DCIsignaling, expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation ofrandom access.

FIG. 9 shows an example of configured BWPs. Bandwidth adaptation usingmultiple BWPs (e.g., three configured BWPs for an NR carrier) may beavailable. A wireless device configured with multiple BWPs (e.g., thethree BWPs) may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point.The BWPs may comprise: a BWP 902 having a bandwidth of 40 MHz and asubcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 having a bandwidth of 10 MHz anda subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 having a bandwidth of 20MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. The BWP 902 may be an initialactive BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP. The wireless devicemay switch between BWPs at switching points. The wireless device mayswitch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908. Theswitching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reasons.The switching at a switching point 908 may occur, for example, after orin response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer (e.g., indicatingswitching to the default BWP). The switching at the switching point 908may occur, for example, after or in response to receiving DCI indicatingBWP 904 as the active BWP. The wireless device may switch at a switchingpoint 910 from an active BWP 904 to the BWP 906, for example, after orin response receiving DCI indicating BWP 906 as a new active BWP. Thewireless device may switch at a switching point 912 from an active BWP906 to the BWP 904, for example, after or in response to an expiry of aBWP inactivity timer. The wireless device may switch at the switchingpoint 912 from an active BWP 906 to the BWP 904, for example, after orin response receiving DCI indicating BWP 904 as a new active BWP. Thewireless device may switch at a switching point 914 from an active BWP904 to the BWP 902, for example, after or in response receiving DCIindicating the BWP 902 as a new active BWP.

Wireless device procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may bethe same/similar as those on a primary cell, for example, if thewireless device is configured for a secondary cell with a defaultdownlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs and a timer value. Thewireless device may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP forthe secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the wireless deviceuses the timer value and/or default BWPs for a primary cell. The timervalue (e.g., the BWP inactivity timer) may be configured per cell (e.g.,for one or more BWPs), for example, via RRC signaling or any othersignaling. One or more active BWPs may switch to another BWP, forexample, based on an expiration of the BWP inactivity timer.

Two or more carriers may be aggregated and data may be simultaneouslytransmitted to/from the same wireless device using carrier aggregation(CA) (e.g., to increase data rates). The aggregated carriers in CA maybe referred to as component carriers (CCs). There may be anumber/quantity of serving cells for the wireless device (e.g., oneserving cell for a CC), for example, if CA is configured/used. The CCsmay have multiple configurations in the frequency domain.

FIG. 10A shows example CA configurations based on CCs. As shown in FIG.10A, three types of CA configurations may comprise an intraband(contiguous) configuration 1002, an intraband (non-contiguous)configuration 1004, and/or an interband configuration 1006. In theintraband (contiguous) configuration 1002, two CCs may be aggregated inthe same frequency band (frequency band A) and may be located directlyadjacent to each other within the frequency band. In the intraband(non-contiguous) configuration 1004, two CCs may be aggregated in thesame frequency band (frequency band A) but may be separated from eachother in the frequency band by a gap. In the interband configuration1006, two CCs may be located in different frequency bands (e.g.,frequency band A and frequency band B, respectively).

A network may set the maximum quantity of CCs that can be aggregated(e.g., up to 32 CCs may be aggregated in NR, or any other quantity maybe aggregated in other systems). The aggregated CCs may have the same ordifferent bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD,FDD, or any other duplexing schemes). A serving cell for a wirelessdevice using CA may have a downlink CC. One or more uplink CCs may beoptionally configured for a serving cell (e.g., for FDD). The ability toaggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, forexample, if the wireless device has more data traffic in the downlinkthan in the uplink.

One of the aggregated cells for a wireless device may be referred to asa primary cell (PCell), for example, if a CA is configured. The PCellmay be the serving cell that the wireless initially connects to oraccess to, for example, during or at an RRC connection establishment, anRRC connection reestablishment, and/or a handover. The PCell mayprovide/configure the wireless device with NAS mobility information andthe security input. Wireless device may have different PCells. For thedownlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to asthe downlink primary CC (DL PCC). For the uplink, the carriercorresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC(UL PCC). The other aggregated cells (e.g., associated with CCs otherthan the DL PCC and UL PCC) for the wireless device may be referred toas secondary cells (SCells). The SCells may be configured, for example,after the PCell is configured for the wireless device. An SCell may beconfigured via an RRC connection reconfiguration procedure. For thedownlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as adownlink secondary CC (DL SCC). For the uplink, the carriercorresponding to the SCell may be referred to as the uplink secondary CC(UL SCC).

Configured SCells for a wireless device may be activated or deactivated,for example, based on traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of anSCell may cause the wireless device to stop PDCCH and PDSCH reception onthe SCell and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell. ConfiguredSCells may be activated or deactivated, for example, using a MAC CE(e.g., the MAC CE described with respect to FIG. 4B). A MAC CE may use abitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in asubset of configured SCells) for the wireless device are activated ordeactivated. Configured SCells may be deactivated, for example, after orin response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer (e.g., oneSCell deactivation timer per SCell may be configured).

DCI may comprise control information, such as scheduling assignments andscheduling grants, for a cell. DCI may be sent/transmitted via the cellcorresponding to the scheduling assignments and/or scheduling grants,which may be referred to as a self-scheduling. DCI comprising controlinformation for a cell may be sent/transmitted via another cell, whichmay be referred to as a cross-carrier scheduling. Uplink controlinformation (UCI) may comprise control information, such as HARQacknowledgments and channel state feedback (e.g., CQI, PMI, and/or RI)for aggregated cells. UCI may be transmitted via an uplink controlchannel (e.g., a PUCCH) of the PCell or a certain SCell (e.g., an SCellconfigured with PUCCH). For a larger number of aggregated downlink CCs,the PUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided intomultiple PUCCH groups.

FIG. 10B shows example group of cells. Aggregated cells may beconfigured into one or more PUCCH groups (e.g., as shown in FIG. 10B).One or more cell groups or one or more uplink control channel groups(e.g., a PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCH group 1050) may comprise one ormore downlink CCs, respectively. The PUCCH group 1010 may comprise oneor more downlink CCs, for example, three downlink CCs: a PCell 1011(e.g., a DL PCC), an SCell 1012 (e.g., a DL SCC), and an SCell 1013(e.g., a DL SCC). The PUCCH group 1050 may comprise one or more downlinkCCs, for example, three downlink CCs: a PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1051(e.g., a DL SCC), an SCell 1052 (e.g., a DL SCC), and an SCell 1053(e.g., a DL SCC). One or more uplink CCs of the PUCCH group 1010 may beconfigured as a PCell 1021 (e.g., a UL PCC), an SCell 1022 (e.g., a ULSCC), and an SCell 1023 (e.g., a UL SCC). One or more uplink CCs of thePUCCH group 1050 may be configured as a PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1061(e.g., a UL SCC), an SCell 1062 (e.g., a UL SCC), and an SCell 1063(e.g., a UL SCC). UCI related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group1010, shown as UCI 1031, UCI 1032, and UCI 1033, may be transmitted viathe uplink of the PCell 1021 (e.g., via the PUCCH of the PCell 1021).UCI related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1050, shown as UCI1071, UCI 1072, and UCI 1073, may be sent/transmitted via the uplink ofthe PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1061 (e.g., via the PUCCH of the PUCCH SCell1061). A single uplink PCell may be configured to send/transmit UCIrelating to the six downlink CCs, for example, if the aggregated cellsshown in FIG. 10B are not divided into the PUCCH group 1010 and thePUCCH group 1050. The PCell 1021 may become overloaded, for example, ifthe UCIs 1031, 1032, 1033, 1071, 1072, and 1073 are sent/transmitted viathe PCell 1021. By dividing transmissions of UCI between the PCell 1021and the PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1061, overloading may be preventedand/or reduced.

A PCell may comprise a downlink carrier (e.g., the PCell 1011) and anuplink carrier (e.g., the PCell 1021). An SCell may comprise only adownlink carrier. A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionallyan uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cellindex. The physical cell ID or the cell index may indicate/identify adownlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example,depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used. Aphysical cell ID may be determined, for example, using a synchronizationsignal (e.g., PSS and/or SSS) transmitted via a downlink componentcarrier. A cell index may be determined, for example, using one or moreRRC messages. A physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID, anda cell index may be referred to as a carrier index. A first physicalcell ID for a first downlink carrier may refer to the first physicalcell ID for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier. Substantiallythe same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrieractivation. Activation of a first carrier may refer to activation of acell comprising the first carrier.

A multi-carrier nature of a PHY layer may be exposed/indicated to a MAClayer (e.g., in a CA configuration). A HARQ entity may operate on aserving cell. A transport block may be generated per assignment/grantper serving cell. A transport block and potential HARQ retransmissionsof the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell.

For the downlink, a base station may send/transmit (e.g., unicast,multicast, and/or broadcast), to one or more wireless devices, one ormore reference signals (RSs) (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DM-RS, and/orPT-RS). For the uplink, the one or more wireless devices maysend/transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DM-RS, PT-RS,and/or SRS). The PSS and the SSS may be sent/transmitted by the basestation and used by the one or more wireless devices to synchronize theone or more wireless devices with the base station. A synchronizationsignal (SS)/physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block may comprise thePSS, the SSS, and the PBCH. The base station may periodicallysend/transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks, which may be referred to asSSBs.

FIG. 11A shows an example mapping of one or more SS/PBCH blocks. A burstof SS/PBCH blocks may comprise one or more SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., 4SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may be sent/transmittedperiodically (e.g., every 2 frames, 20 ms, or any other durations). Aburst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame havinga duration of 5 ms). Such parameters (e.g., the number of SS/PBCH blocksper burst, periodicity of bursts, position of the burst within theframe) may be configured, for example, based on at least one of: acarrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block issent/transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; aconfiguration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); and/or anyother suitable factor(s). A wireless device may assume a subcarrierspacing for the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency beingmonitored, for example, unless the radio network configured the wirelessdevice to assume a different subcarrier spacing.

The SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain(e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in FIG. 11A or any other quantity/numberof symbols) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain(e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers or any other quantity/number ofsubcarriers). The PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common centerfrequency. The PSS may be sent/transmitted first and may span, forexample, 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The SSS may besent/transmitted after the PSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The PBCH may be sent/transmitted afterthe PSS (e.g., across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240subcarriers (e.g., in the second and fourth OFDM symbols as shown inFIG. 11A) and/or may span fewer than 240 subcarriers (e.g., in the thirdOFDM symbols as shown in FIG. 11A).

The location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains maynot be known to the wireless device (e.g., if the wireless device issearching for the cell). The wireless device may monitor a carrier forthe PSS, for example, to find and select the cell. The wireless devicemay monitor a frequency location within the carrier. The wireless devicemay search for the PSS at a different frequency location within thecarrier, for example, if the PSS is not found after a certain duration(e.g., 20 ms). The wireless device may search for the PSS at a differentfrequency location within the carrier, for example, as indicated by asynchronization raster. The wireless device may determine the locationsof the SSS and the PBCH, respectively, for example, based on a knownstructure of the SS/PBCH block if the PSS is found at a location in thetime and frequency domains. The SS/PBCH block may be a cell-defining SSblock (CD-SSB). A primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB. TheCD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster. A cellselection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD-SSB.

The SS/PBCH block may be used by the wireless device to determine one ormore parameters of the cell. The wireless device may determine aphysical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell, for example, based on thesequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The wireless device maydetermine a location of a frame boundary of the cell, for example, basedon the location of the SS/PBCH block. The SS/PBCH block may indicatethat it has been sent/transmitted in accordance with a transmissionpattern. An SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern may be a knowndistance from the frame boundary (e.g., a predefined distance for a RANconfiguration among one or more networks, one or more base stations, andone or more wireless devices).

The PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and/or forward error correction(FEC). The FEC may use polar coding. One or more symbols spanned by thePBCH may comprise/carry one or more DM-RSs for demodulation of the PBCH.The PBCH may comprise an indication of a current system frame number(SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parametersmay facilitate time synchronization of the wireless device to the basestation. The PBCH may comprise a MIB used to send/transmit to thewireless device one or more parameters. The MIB may be used by thewireless device to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI)associated with the cell. The RMSI may comprise a System InformationBlock Type 1 (SIB1). The SIB1 may comprise information for the wirelessdevice to access the cell. The wireless device may use one or moreparameters of the MIB to monitor a PDCCH, which may be used to schedulea PDSCH. The PDSCH may comprise the SIB1. The SIB1 may be decoded usingparameters provided/comprised in the MIB. The PBCH may indicate anabsence of SIB1. The wireless device may be pointed to a frequency, forexample, based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1. The wirelessdevice may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which thewireless device is pointed.

The wireless device may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blockssent/transmitted with a same SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located(QCLed) (e.g., having substantially the same/similar Doppler spread,Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rxparameters). The wireless device may not assume QCL for SS/PBCH blocktransmissions having different SS/PBCH block indices. SS/PBCH blocks(e.g., those within a half-frame) may be sent/transmitted in spatialdirections (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of thecell). A first SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in a first spatialdirection using a first beam, a second SS/PBCH block may besent/transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam, athird SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in a third spatial directionusing a third beam, a fourth SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in afourth spatial direction using a fourth beam, etc.

A base station may send/transmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks, forexample, within a frequency span of a carrier. A first PCI of a firstSS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from asecond PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks.The PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks sent/transmitted in different frequencylocations may be different or substantially the same.

The CSI-RS may be sent/transmitted by the base station and used by thewireless device to acquire/obtain/determine channel state information(CSI). The base station may configure the wireless device with one ormore CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose. Thebase station may configure a wireless device with one or more of thesame/similar CSI-RSs. The wireless device may measure the one or moreCSI-RSs. The wireless device may estimate a downlink channel stateand/or generate a CSI report, for example, based on the measuring of theone or more downlink CSI-RSs. The wireless device may send/transmit theCSI report to the base station (e.g., based on periodic CSI reporting,semi-persistent CSI reporting, and/or aperiodic CSI reporting). The basestation may use feedback provided by the wireless device (e.g., theestimated downlink channel state) to perform a link adaptation.

The base station may semi-statically configure the wireless device withone or more CSI-RS resource sets. A CSI-RS resource may be associatedwith a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity. Thebase station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RSresource. The base station may indicate to the wireless device that aCSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/ordeactivated.

The base station may configure the wireless device to report CSImeasurements. The base station may configure the wireless device toprovide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently.For periodic CSI reporting, the wireless device may be configured with atiming and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports. For aperiodicCSI reporting, the base station may request a CSI report. The basestation may command the wireless device to measure a configured CSI-RSresource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurement(s). Forsemi-persistent CSI reporting, the base station may configure thewireless device to send/transmit periodically, and selectively activateor deactivate the periodic reporting (e.g., via one or moreactivation/deactivation MAC CEs and/or one or more DCIs). The basestation may configure the wireless device with a CSI-RS resource set andCSI reports, for example, using RRC signaling.

The CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating,for example, up to 32 antenna ports (or any other quantity of antennaports). The wireless device may be configured to use/employ the sameOFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a CORESET, for example, if thedownlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially QCLed and resource elementsassociated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resourceblocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET. The wireless device may beconfigured to use/employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS andSS/PBCH blocks, for example, if the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocksare spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlinkCSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.

Downlink DM-RSs may be sent/transmitted by a base station andreceived/used by a wireless device for a channel estimation. Thedownlink DM-RSs may be used for coherent demodulation of one or moredownlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH). A network (e.g., an NRnetwork) may support one or more variable and/or configurable DM-RSpatterns for data demodulation. At least one downlink DM-RSconfiguration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. A front-loadedDM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or twoadjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi-statically configure thewireless device with a number/quantity (e.g. a maximum number/quantity)of front-loaded DM-RS symbols for a PDSCH. A DM-RS configuration maysupport one or more DM-RS ports. A DM-RS configuration may support up toeight orthogonal downlink DM-RS ports per wireless device (e.g., forsingle user-MIMO). A DM-RS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonaldownlink DM-RS ports per wireless device (e.g., for multiuser-MIMO). Aradio network may support (e.g., at least for CP-OFDM) a common DM-RSstructure for downlink and uplink. A DM-RS location, a DM-RS pattern,and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different. The basestation may send/transmit a downlink DM-RS and a corresponding PDSCH,for example, using the same precoding matrix. The wireless device mayuse the one or more downlink DM-RSs for coherent demodulation/channelestimation of the PDSCH.

A transmitter (e.g., a transmitter of a base station) may use a precodermatrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth. The transmitter may usea first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precodermatrix for a second bandwidth. The first precoder matrix and the secondprecoder matrix may be different, for example, based on the firstbandwidth being different from the second bandwidth. The wireless devicemay assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs.The set of PRBs may be determined/indicated/identified/denoted as aprecoding resource block group (PRG).

A PDSCH may comprise one or more layers. The wireless device may assumethat at least one symbol with DM-RS is present on a layer of the one ormore layers of the PDSCH. A higher layer may configure one or moreDM-RSs for a PDSCH (e.g., up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH). Downlink PT-RSmay be sent/transmitted by a base station and used by a wireless device,for example, for a phase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS ispresent or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/orthe pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a wirelessdevice-specific basis, for example, using a combination of RRC signalingand/or an association with one or more parameters used/employed forother purposes (e.g., modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may beindicated by DCI. A dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS, if configured,may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at leastMCS. A network (e.g., an NR network) may support a plurality of PT-RSdensities defined in the time and/or frequency domains. A frequencydomain density (if configured/present) may be associated with at leastone configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The wireless device mayassume a same precoding for a DM-RS port and a PT-RS port. Thequantity/number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than the quantity/number ofDM-RS ports in a scheduled resource. Downlink PT-RS may beconfigured/allocated/confined in the scheduled time/frequency durationfor the wireless device. Downlink PT-RS may be sent/transmitted viasymbols, for example, to facilitate a phase tracking at the receiver.

The wireless device may send/transmit an uplink DM-RS to a base station,for example, for a channel estimation. The base station may use theuplink DM-RS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physicalchannels. The wireless device may send/transmit an uplink DM-RS with aPUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequenciesthat is similar to a range of frequencies associated with thecorresponding physical channel. The base station may configure thewireless device with one or more uplink DM-RS configurations. At leastone DM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. Thefront-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g.,one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more uplink DM-RSs may beconfigured to send/transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or aPUCCH. The base station may semi-statically configure the wirelessdevice with a number/quantity (e.g. the maximum number/quantity) offront-loaded DM-RS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which thewireless device may use to schedule a single-symbol DM-RS and/or adouble-symbol DM-RS. A network (e.g., an NR network) may support (e.g.,for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM))a common DM-RS structure for downlink and uplink. A DM-RS location, aDM-RS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DM-RS may besubstantially the same or different.

A PUSCH may comprise one or more layers. A wireless device maysend/transmit at least one symbol with DM-RS present on a layer of theone or more layers of the PUSCH. A higher layer may configure one ormore DM-RSs (e.g., up to three DMRSs) for the PUSCH. Uplink PT-RS (whichmay be used by a base station for a phase tracking and/or a phase-noisecompensation) may or may not be present, for example, depending on anRRC configuration of the wireless device. The presence and/or thepattern of an uplink PT-RS may be configured on a wirelessdevice-specific basis (e.g., a UE-specific basis), for example, by acombination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parametersconfigured/employed for other purposes (e.g., MCS), which may beindicated by DCI. A dynamic presence of an uplink PT-RS, if configured,may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at leastMCS. A radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densitiesdefined in time/frequency domain. A frequency domain density (ifconfigured/present) may be associated with at least one configuration ofa scheduled bandwidth. The wireless device may assume a same precodingfor a DM-RS port and a PT-RS port. A quantity/number of PT-RS ports maybe less than a quantity/number of DM-RS ports in a scheduled resource.An uplink PT-RS may be configured/allocated/confined in the scheduledtime/frequency duration for the wireless device.

One or more SRSs may be sent/transmitted by a wireless device to a basestation, for example, for a channel state estimation to support uplinkchannel dependent scheduling and/or a link adaptation. SRSsent/transmitted by the wireless device may enable/allow a base stationto estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies. Ascheduler at the base station may use/employ the estimated uplinkchannel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCHtransmission for the wireless device. The base station maysemi-statically configure the wireless device with one or more SRSresource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configurethe wireless device with one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource setapplicability may be configured, for example, by a higher layer (e.g.,RRC) parameter. An SRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or moreSRS resource sets (e.g., with the same/similar time domain behavior,periodic, aperiodic, and/or the like) may be sent/transmitted at a timeinstant (e.g., simultaneously), for example, if a higher layer parameterindicates beam management. The wireless device may send/transmit one ormore SRS resources in SRS resource sets. A network (e.g., an NR network)may support aperiodic, periodic, and/or semi-persistent SRStransmissions. The wireless device may send/transmit SRS resources, forexample, based on one or more trigger types. The one or more triggertypes may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or moreDCI formats. At least one DCI format may be used/employed for thewireless device to select at least one of one or more configured SRSresource sets. An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered basedon higher layer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRStriggered based on one or more DCI formats. The wireless device may beconfigured to send/transmit an SRS, for example, after a transmission ofa PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DM-RS if a PUSCH and an SRS aresent/transmitted in a same slot. A base station may semi-staticallyconfigure a wireless device with one or more SRS configurationparameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resourceconfiguration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior ofan SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication of periodic,semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, mini-slot, and/or subframelevel periodicity; an offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRSresource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDMsymbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hoppingbandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.

An antenna port may be determined/defined such that the channel overwhich a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from thechannel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed.The receiver may infer/determine the channel (e.g., fading gain,multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying a second symbol on anantenna port, from the channel for conveying a first symbol on theantenna port, for example, if the first symbol and the second symbol aresent/transmitted on the same antenna port. A first antenna port and asecond antenna port may be referred to as quasi co-located (QCLed), forexample, if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over whicha first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferredfrom the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port isconveyed. The one or more large-scale properties may comprise at leastone of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an averagegain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.

Channels that use beamforming may require beam management. Beammanagement may comprise a beam measurement, a beam selection, and/or abeam indication. A beam may be associated with one or more referencesignals. A beam may be identified by one or more beamformed referencesignals. The wireless device may perform a downlink beam measurement,for example, based on one or more downlink reference signals (e.g., aCSI-RS) and generate a beam measurement report. The wireless device mayperform the downlink beam measurement procedure, for example, after anRRC connection is set up with a base station.

FIG. 11B shows an example mapping of one or more CSI-RSs. The CSI-RSsmay be mapped in the time and frequency domains. Each rectangular blockshown in FIG. 11B may correspond to a resource block (RB) within abandwidth of a cell. A base station may send/transmit one or more RRCmessages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicatingone or more CSI-RSs. One or more of parameters may be configured byhigher layer signaling (e.g., RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RSresource configuration. The one or more of the parameters may compriseat least one of: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number ofCSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symbol and resource element(RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g., asubframe location, an offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), aCSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code divisionmultiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmissioncomb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g., QCL-scramblingidentity,crs-portscount, mbsfn-subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid,qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid), and/or other radio resource parameters.

One or more beams may be configured for a wireless device in a wirelessdevice-specific configuration. Three beams are shown in FIG. 11B (beam#1, beam #2, and beam #3), but more or fewer beams may be configured.Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be sent/transmittedin one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol. Beam #2 may beallocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be sent/transmitted in one or moresubcarriers in an RB of a second symbol. Beam #3 may be allocated withCSI-RS 1103 that may be sent/transmitted in one or more subcarriers inan RB of a third symbol. A base station may use other subcarriers in thesame RB (e.g., those that are not used to send/transmit CSI-RS 1101) totransmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another wirelessdevice, for example, by using frequency division multiplexing (FDM).Beams used for a wireless device may be configured such that beams forthe wireless device use symbols different from symbols used by beams ofother wireless devices, for example, by using time domain multiplexing(TDM). A wireless device may be served with beams in orthogonal symbols(e.g., no overlapping symbols), for example, by using the TDM.

CSI-RSs (e.g., CSI-RSs 1101, 1102, 1103) may be sent/transmitted by thebase station and used by the wireless device for one or moremeasurements. The wireless device may measure an RSRP of configuredCSI-RS resources. The base station may configure the wireless devicewith a reporting configuration, and the wireless device may report theRSRP measurements to a network (e.g., via one or more base stations)based on the reporting configuration. The base station may determine,based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmissionconfiguration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of referencesignals. The base station may indicate one or more TCI states to thewireless device (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or DCI). Thewireless device may receive a downlink transmission with an Rx beamdetermined based on the one or more TCI states. The wireless device mayor may not have a capability of beam correspondence. The wireless devicemay determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam, forexample, based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam,if the wireless device has the capability of beam correspondence. Thewireless device may perform an uplink beam selection procedure todetermine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam, for example, if thewireless device does not have the capability of beam correspondence. Thewireless device may perform the uplink beam selection procedure, forexample, based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resourcesconfigured to the wireless device by the base station. The base stationmay select and indicate uplink beams for the wireless device, forexample, based on measurements of the one or more SRS resourcessent/transmitted by the wireless device.

A wireless device may determine/assess (e.g., measure) a channel qualityof one or more beam pair links, for example, in a beam managementprocedure. A beam pair link may comprise a Tx beam of a base station andan Rx beam of the wireless device. The Tx beam of the base station maysend/transmit a downlink signal, and the Rx beam of the wireless devicemay receive the downlink signal. The wireless device may send/transmit abeam measurement report, for example, based on theassessment/determination. The beam measurement report may indicate oneor more beam pair quality parameters comprising at least one of: one ormore beam identifications (e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index,or the like), an RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channelquality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (RI).

FIG. 12A shows examples of downlink beam management procedures. One ormore downlink beam management procedures (e.g., downlink beam managementprocedures P1, P2, and P3) may be performed. Procedure P1 may enable ameasurement (e.g., a wireless device measurement) on Tx beams of a TRP(or multiple TRPs) (e.g., to support a selection of one or more basestation Tx beams and/or wireless device Rx beams). The Tx beams of abase station and the Rx beams of a wireless device are shown as ovals inthe top row of P1 and bottom row of P1, respectively. Beamforming (e.g.,at a TRP) may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (e.g., thebeam sweeps shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in acounter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows). Beamforming(e.g., at a wireless device) may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set ofbeams (e.g., the beam sweeps shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, asovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows).Procedure P2 may be used to enable a measurement (e.g., a wirelessdevice measurement) on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2,as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by thedashed arrow). The wireless device and/or the base station may performprocedure P2, for example, using a smaller set of beams than the set ofbeams used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams usedin procedure P1. Procedure P2 may be referred to as a beam refinement.The wireless device may perform procedure P3 for an Rx beamdetermination, for example, by using the same Tx beam(s) of the basestation and sweeping Rx beam(s) of the wireless device.

FIG. 12B shows examples of uplink beam management procedures. One ormore uplink beam management procedures (e.g., uplink beam managementprocedures U1, U2, and U3) may be performed. Procedure U1 may be used toenable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a wirelessdevice (e.g., to support a selection of one or more Tx beams of thewireless device and/or Rx beams of the base station). The Tx beams ofthe wireless device and the Rx beams of the base station are shown asovals in the top row of U1 and bottom row of U1, respectively).Beamforming (e.g., at the wireless device) may comprise one or more beamsweeps, for example, a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in thebottom rows of U1 and U3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise directionindicated by the dashed arrows). Beamforming (e.g., at the base station)may comprise one or more beam sweeps, for example, an Rx beam sweep froma set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated ina counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows). ProcedureU2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam, forexample, if the UE uses a fixed Tx beam. The wireless device and/or thebase station may perform procedure U2, for example, using a smaller setof beams than the set of beams used in procedure P1, or using narrowerbeams than the beams used in procedure P1. Procedure U2 may be referredto as a beam refinement. The wireless device may perform procedure U3 toadjust its Tx beam, for example, if the base station uses a fixed Rxbeam.

A wireless device may initiate/start/perform a beam failure recovery(BFR) procedure, for example, based on detecting a beam failure. Thewireless device may send/transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, UCI,an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like), for example, based on the initiatingthe BFR procedure. The wireless device may detect the beam failure, forexample, based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) ofan associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an errorrate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lowerthan a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/orthe like).

The wireless device may measure a quality of a beam pair link, forexample, using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one ormore SS/PBCH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or moreDM-RSs. A quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of ablock error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plusnoise ratio (SINR) value, an RSRQ value, and/or a CSI value measured onRS resources. The base station may indicate that an RS resource is QCLedwith one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g., a control channel, a shareddata channel, and/or the like). The RS resource and the one or moreDM-RSs of the channel may be QCLed, for example, if the channelcharacteristics (e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, an average delay,delay spread, a spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from atransmission via the RS resource to the wireless device are similar orthe same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via thechannel to the wireless device.

A network (e.g., an NR network comprising a gNB and/or an ng-eNB) and/orthe wireless device may initiate/start/perform a random accessprocedure. A wireless device in an RRC idle (e.g., an RRC_IDLE) stateand/or an RRC inactive (e.g., an RRC_INACTIVE) state mayinitiate/perform the random access procedure to request a connectionsetup to a network. The wireless device may initiate/start/perform therandom access procedure from an RRC connected (e.g., an RRC_CONNECTED)state. The wireless device may initiate/start/perform the random accessprocedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplink transmission ofan SR if there is no PUCCH resource available) and/oracquire/obtain/determine an uplink timing (e.g., if an uplinksynchronization status is non-synchronized). The wireless device mayinitiate/start/perform the random access procedure to request one ormore system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g., other system informationblocks, such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like). The wireless device mayinitiate/start/perform the random access procedure for a beam failurerecovery request. A network may initiate/start/perform a random accessprocedure, for example, for a handover and/or for establishing timealignment for an SCell addition.

FIG. 13A shows an example four-step random access procedure. Thefour-step random access procedure may comprise a four-stepcontention-based random access procedure. A base station maysend/transmit a configuration message 1310 to a wireless device, forexample, before initiating the random access procedure. The four-steprandom access procedure may comprise transmissions of four messagescomprising: a first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311), a second message (e.g.,Msg 2 1312), a third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313), and a fourth message(e.g., Msg 4 1314). The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may comprise apreamble (or a random access preamble). The first message (e.g., Msg 11311) may be referred to as a preamble. The second message (e.g., Msg 21312) may comprise as a random access response (RAR). The second message(e.g., Msg 2 1312) may be referred to as an RAR.

The configuration message 1310 may be sent/transmitted, for example,using one or more RRC messages. The one or more RRC messages mayindicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to thewireless device. The one or more RACH parameters may comprise at leastone of: general parameters for one or more random access procedures(e.g., RACH-configGeneral); cell-specific parameters (e.g.,RACH-ConfigCommon); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g.,RACH-configDedicated). The base station may send/transmit (e.g.,broadcast or multicast) the one or more RRC messages to one or morewireless devices. The one or more RRC messages may be wirelessdevice-specific. The one or more RRC messages that are wirelessdevice-specific may be, for example, dedicated RRC messagessent/transmitted to a wireless device in an RRC connected (e.g., anRRC_CONNECTED) state and/or in an RRC inactive (e.g., an RRC_INACTIVE)state. The wireless devices may determine, based on the one or more RACHparameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit powerfor transmission of the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or thethird message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The wireless device may determine areception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the second message(e.g., Msg 2 1312) and the fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314), forexample, based on the one or more RACH parameters.

The one or more RACH parameters provided/configured/comprised in theconfiguration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH(PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the first message (e.g.,Msg 1 1311). The one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined (e.g., bya network comprising one or more base stations). The one or more RACHparameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACHoccasions (e.g., prach-ConfigIndex). The one or more RACH parameters mayindicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b)one or more reference signals. The one or more RACH parameters mayindicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one ormore reference signals. The one or more reference signals may be SS/PBCHblocks and/or CSI-RSs. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate aquantity/number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or aquantity/number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks.

The one or more RACH parameters provided/configured/comprised in theconfiguration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmitpower of first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or third message (e.g.,Msg 3 1313). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate a referencepower for a preamble transmission (e.g., a received target power and/oran initial power of the preamble transmission). There may be one or morepower offsets indicated by the one or more RACH parameters. The one ormore RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offsetbetween SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of thefirst message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and the third message (e.g., Msg 31313); and/or a power offset value between preamble groups. The one ormore RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds, for example,based on which the wireless device may determine at least one referencesignal (e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., anormal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).

The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may comprise one or more preambletransmissions (e.g., a preamble transmission and one or more preambleretransmissions). An RRC message may be used to configure one or morepreamble groups (e.g., group A and/or group B). A preamble group maycomprise one or more preambles. The wireless device may determine thepreamble group, for example, based on a pathloss measurement and/or asize of the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The wireless device maymeasure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/orCSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRPabove an RSRP threshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/orrsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS). The wireless device may select at least onepreamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or aselected preamble group, for example, if the association between the oneor more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured byan RRC message.

The wireless device may determine the preamble, for example, based onthe one or more RACH parameters provided/configured/comprised in theconfiguration message 1310. The wireless device may determine thepreamble, for example, based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRPmeasurement, and/or a size of the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). Theone or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximumquantity/number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholdsfor determining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B).A base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure thewireless device with an association between one or more preambles andone or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs). The wirelessdevice may determine the preamble to be comprised in first message(e.g., Msg 1 1311), for example, based on the association if theassociation is configured. The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may besent/transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions.The wireless device may use one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBsand/or CSI-RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of thePRACH occasion. One or more RACH parameters (e.g.,ra-ssb-OccasionMskIndex and/or ra-OccasionList) may indicate anassociation between the PRACH occasions and the one or more referencesignals.

The wireless device may perform a preamble retransmission, for example,if no response is received after or in response to a preambletransmission (e.g., for a period of time, such as a monitoring windowfor monitoring an RAR). The wireless device may increase an uplinktransmit power for the preamble retransmission. The wireless device mayselect an initial preamble transmit power, for example, based on apathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble power configuredby the network. The wireless device may determine to resend/retransmit apreamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power. The wireless devicemay receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g.,PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preambleretransmission. The ramping step may be an amount of incrementalincrease in uplink transmit power for a retransmission. The wirelessdevice may ramp up the uplink transmit power, for example, if thewireless device determines a reference signal (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS)that is the same as a previous preamble transmission. The wirelessdevice may count the quantity/number of preamble transmissions and/orretransmissions, for example, using a counter parameter (e.g.,PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER). The wireless device may determine that arandom access procedure has been completed unsuccessfully, for example,if the quantity/number of preamble transmissions exceeds a thresholdconfigured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax)without receiving a successful response (e.g., an RAR).

The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) (e.g., received by the wirelessdevice) may comprise an RAR. The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) maycomprise multiple RARs corresponding to multiple wireless devices. Thesecond message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may be received, for example, after orin response to the transmitting of the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311).The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may be scheduled on the DL-SCH andmay be indicated by a PDCCH, for example, using a random access radionetwork temporary identifier (RA RNTI). The second message (e.g., Msg 21312) may indicate that the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) wasreceived by the base station. The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) maycomprise a time-alignment command that may be used by the wirelessdevice to adjust the transmission timing of the wireless device, ascheduling grant for transmission of the third message (e.g., Msg 31313), and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI). The wireless device maydetermine/start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor aPDCCH for the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312), for example, aftertransmitting the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) (e.g., a preamble).The wireless device may determine the start time of the time window, forexample, based on a PRACH occasion that the wireless device uses tosend/transmit the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) (e.g., the preamble).The wireless device may start the time window one or more symbols afterthe last symbol of the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) comprising thepreamble (e.g., the symbol in which the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311)comprising the preamble transmission was completed or at a first PDCCHoccasion from an end of a preamble transmission). The one or moresymbols may be determined based on a numerology. The PDCCH may be mappedin a common search space (e.g., a Type 1-PDCCH common search space)configured by an RRC message. The wireless device may identify/determinethe RAR, for example, based on an RNTI. Radio network temporaryidentifiers (RNTIs) may be used depending on one or more eventsinitiating/starting the random access procedure. The wireless device mayuse a RA-RNTI, for example, for one or more communications associatedwith random access or any other purpose. The RA-RNTI may be associatedwith PRACH occasions in which the wireless device sends/transmits apreamble. The wireless device may determine the RA-RNTI, for example,based on at least one of: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; afrequency domain index; and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACHoccasions. An example RA-RNTI may be determined as follows:

RA-RNTI=1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id

where s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion(e.g., 0≤s_id<14), t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACHoccasion in a system frame (e.g., 0≤t_id<80), f_id may be an index ofthe PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0≤f_id<8), andul_carrier_id may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission(e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).

The wireless device may send/transmit the third message (e.g., Msg 31313), for example, after or in response to a successful reception ofthe second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) (e.g., using resources identifiedin the Msg 2 1312). The third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) may be used,for example, for contention resolution in the contention-based randomaccess procedure. A plurality of wireless devices may send/transmit thesame preamble to a base station, and the base station may send/transmitan RAR that corresponds to a wireless device. Collisions may occur, forexample, if the plurality of wireless device interpret the RAR ascorresponding to themselves. Contention resolution (e.g., using thethird message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) and the fourth message (e.g., Msg 41314)) may be used to increase the likelihood that the wireless devicedoes not incorrectly use an identity of another the wireless device. Thewireless device may comprise a device identifier in the third message(e.g., Msg 3 1313) (e.g., a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC RNTI comprised inthe second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312), and/or any other suitableidentifier), for example, to perform contention resolution.

The fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314) may be received, for example,after or in response to the transmitting of the third message (e.g., Msg3 1313). The base station may address the wireless on the PDCCH (e.g.,the base station may send the PDCCH to the wireless device) using aC-RNTI, for example, If the C-RNTI was included in the third message(e.g., Msg 3 1313). The random access procedure may be determined to besuccessfully completed, for example, if the unique C RNTI of thewireless device is detected on the PDCCH (e.g., the PDCCH is scrambledby the C-RNTI). fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314) may be received usinga DL-SCH associated with a TC RNTI, for example, if the TC RNTI iscomprised in the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) (e.g., if the wirelessdevice is in an RRC idle (e.g., an RRC_IDLE) state or not otherwiseconnected to the base station). The wireless device may determine thatthe contention resolution is successful and/or the wireless device maydetermine that the random access procedure is successfully completed,for example, if a MAC PDU is successfully decoded and a MAC PDUcomprises the wireless device contention resolution identity MAC CE thatmatches or otherwise corresponds with the CCCH SDU sent/transmitted inthird message (e.g., Msg 3 1313).

The wireless device may be configured with an SUL carrier and/or an NULcarrier. An initial access (e.g., random access) may be supported via anuplink carrier. A base station may configure the wireless device withmultiple RACH configurations (e.g., two separate RACH configurationscomprising: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier).For random access in a cell configured with an SUL carrier, the networkmay indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL). The wireless device maydetermine to use the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality ofone or more reference signals (e.g., one or more reference signalsassociated with the NUL carrier) is lower than a broadcast threshold.Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the firstmessage (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313))may remain on, or may be performed via, the selected carrier. Thewireless device may switch an uplink carrier during the random accessprocedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313). Thewireless device may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for thefirst message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or the third message (e.g., Msg 31313), for example, based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., alisten-before-talk).

FIG. 13B shows a two-step random access procedure. The two-step randomaccess procedure may comprise a two-step contention-free random accessprocedure. Similar to the four-step contention-based random accessprocedure, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure,send/transmit a configuration message 1320 to the wireless device. Theconfiguration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to theconfiguration message 1310. The procedure shown in FIG. 13B may comprisetransmissions of two messages: a first message (e.g., Msg 1 1321) and asecond message (e.g., Msg 2 1322). The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1321)and the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1322) may be analogous in somerespects to the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and a second message(e.g., Msg 2 1312), respectively. The two-step contention-free randomaccess procedure may not comprise messages analogous to the thirdmessage (e.g., Msg 3 1313) and/or the fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314).

The two-step (e.g., contention-free) random access procedure may beconfigured/initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, anSCell addition, and/or a handover. A base station may indicate, orassign to, the wireless device a preamble to be used for the firstmessage (e.g., Msg 1 1321). The wireless device may receive, from thebase station via a PDCCH and/or an RRC, an indication of the preamble(e.g., ra-PreambleIndex).

The wireless device may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) tomonitor a PDCCH for the RAR, for example, after or in response tosending/transmitting the preamble. The base station may configure thewireless device with one or more beam failure recovery parameters, suchas a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search spaceindicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceId). The basestation may configure the one or more beam failure recovery parameters,for example, in association with a beam failure recovery request. Theseparate time window for monitoring the PDCCH and/or an RAR may beconfigured to start after transmitting a beam failure recovery request(e.g., the window may start any quantity of symbols and/or slots aftertransmitting the beam failure recovery request). The wireless device maymonitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) onthe search space. During the two-step (e.g., contention-free) randomaccess procedure, the wireless device may determine that a random accessprocedure is successful, for example, after or in response totransmitting first message (e.g., Msg 1 1321) and receiving acorresponding second message (e.g., Msg 2 1322). The wireless device maydetermine that a random access procedure has successfully beencompleted, for example, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to acorresponding C-RNTI. The wireless device may determine that a randomaccess procedure has successfully been completed, for example, if thewireless device receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifiercorresponding to a preamble sent/transmitted by the wireless deviceand/or the RAR comprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier. Thewireless device may determine the response as an indication of anacknowledgement for an SI request.

FIG. 13C shows an example two-step random access procedure. Similar tothe random access procedures shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a base stationmay, prior to initiation of the procedure, send/transmit a configurationmessage 1330 to the wireless device. The configuration message 1330 maybe analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/orthe configuration message 1320. The procedure shown in FIG. 13C maycomprise transmissions of multiple messages (e.g., two messagescomprising: a first message (e.g., Msg A 1331) and a second message(e.g., Msg B 1332)).

Msg A 1320 may be sent/transmitted in an uplink transmission by thewireless device. Msg A 1320 may comprise one or more transmissions of apreamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block1342. The transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similarand/or equivalent to the contents of the third message (e.g., Msg 31313) (e.g., shown in FIG. 13A). The transport block 1342 may compriseUCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like). The wireless devicemay receive the second message (e.g., Msg B 1332), for example, after orin response to transmitting the first message (e.g., Msg A 1331). Thesecond message (e.g., Msg B 1332) may comprise contents that are similarand/or equivalent to the contents of the second message (e.g., Msg 21312) (e.g., an RAR shown in FIG. 13A), the contents of the secondmessage (e.g., Msg 2 1322) (e.g., an RAR shown in FIG. 13B) and/or thefourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314) (e.g., shown in FIG. 13A).

The wireless device may start/initiate the two-step random accessprocedure (e.g., the two-step random access procedure shown in FIG. 13C)for a licensed spectrum and/or an unlicensed spectrum. The wirelessdevice may determine, based on one or more factors, whether tostart/initiate the two-step random access procedure. The one or morefactors may comprise at least one of: a radio access technology in use(e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the wireless device has avalid TA or not; a cell size; the RRC state of the wireless device; atype of spectrum (e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any othersuitable factors.

The wireless device may determine, based on two-step RACH parameterscomprised in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or anuplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block1342 (e.g., comprised in the first message (e.g., Msg A 1331)). The RACHparameters may indicate an MCS, a time-frequency resource, and/or apower control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342. Atime-frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 (e.g., aPRACH) and a time-frequency resource for transmission of the transportblock 1342 (e.g., a PUSCH) may be multiplexed using FDM, TDM, and/orCDM. The RACH parameters may enable the wireless device to determine areception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/orreceiving second message (e.g., Msg B 1332).

The transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data),an identifier of the wireless device, security information, and/ordevice information (e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity(IMSI)). The base station may send/transmit the second message (e.g.,Msg B 1332) as a response to the first message (e.g., Msg A 1331). Thesecond message (e.g., Msg B 1332) may comprise at least one of: apreamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command;an uplink grant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MCS); awireless device identifier (e.g., a UE identifier for contentionresolution); and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI). The wirelessdevice may determine that the two-step random access procedure issuccessfully completed, for example, if a preamble identifier in thesecond message (e.g., Msg B 1332) corresponds to, or is matched to, apreamble sent/transmitted by the wireless device and/or the identifierof the wireless device in second message (e.g., Msg B 1332) correspondsto, or is matched to, the identifier of the wireless device in the firstmessage (e.g., Msg A 1331) (e.g., the transport block 1342).

A wireless device and a base station may exchange control signaling(e.g., control information). The control signaling may be referred to asL1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g.,layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g., layer 2) of the wireless device orthe base station. The control signaling may comprise downlink controlsignaling sent/transmitted from the base station to the wireless deviceand/or uplink control signaling sent/transmitted from the wirelessdevice to the base station.

The downlink control signaling may comprise at least one of: a downlinkscheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplinkradio resources and/or a transport format; slot format information; apreemption indication; a power control command; and/or any othersuitable signaling. The wireless device may receive the downlink controlsignaling in a payload sent/transmitted by the base station via a PDCCH.The payload sent/transmitted via the PDCCH may be referred to asdownlink control information (DCI). The PDCCH may be a group commonPDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of wireless devices. TheGC-PDCCH may be scrambled by a group common RNTI.

A base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC)parity bits to DCI, for example, in order to facilitate detection oftransmission errors. The base station may scramble the CRC parity bitswith an identifier of a wireless device (or an identifier of a group ofwireless devices), for example, if the DCI is intended for the wirelessdevice (or the group of the wireless devices). Scrambling the CRC paritybits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or anexclusive-OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits.The identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of an RNTI.

DCIs may be used for different purposes. A purpose may be indicated bythe type of an RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits. DCI having CRCparity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI (P-RNTI) may indicate paginginformation and/or a system information change notification. The P-RNTImay be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal. DCI having CRC parity bitsscrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate abroadcast transmission of the system information. The SI-RNTI may bepredefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal. DCI having CRC parity bitsscrambled with a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI) may indicate a randomaccess response (RAR). DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cellRNTI (C-RNTI) may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmissionand/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access. DCI having CRCparity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI (TC-RNTI) may indicatea contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 3 1313 shownin FIG. 13A). Other RNTIs configured for a wireless device by a basestation may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS RNTI), a TransmitPower Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit PowerControl-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI(TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot FormatIndication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), aModulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C RNTI), and/or the like.

Abase station may send/transmit DCIs with one or more DCI formats, forexample, depending on the purpose and/or content of the DCIs. DCI format0_0 may be used for scheduling of a PUSCH in a cell. DCI format 0_0 maybe a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format0_1 may be used for scheduling of a PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCIpayloads than DCI format 0_0). DCI format 1_0 may be used for schedulingof a PDSCH in a cell. DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g.,with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling ofa PDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0).DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to agroup of wireless devices. DCI format 2_1 may be used forinforming/notifying a group of wireless devices of a physical resourceblock and/or an OFDM symbol where the group of wireless devices mayassume no transmission is intended to the group of wireless devices. DCIformat 2_2 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control(TPC) command for PUCCH or PUSCH. DCI format 2_3 may be used fortransmission of a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one ormore wireless devices. DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined infuture releases. DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may sharethe same DCI size.

The base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polarcoding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation, for example,after scrambling the DCI with an RNTI. A base station may map the codedand modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for aPDCCH. The base station may send/transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupyinga number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs), for example,based on a payload size of the DCI and/or a coverage of the basestation. The number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregationlevel) may be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number. A CCEmay comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs). A REGmay comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol. The mapping of thecoded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mappingof CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping).

FIG. 14A shows an example of CORESET configurations. The CORESETconfigurations may be for a bandwidth part or any other frequency bands.The base station may send/transmit DCI via a PDCCH on one or morecontrol resource sets (CORESETs). A CORESET may comprise atime-frequency resource in which the wireless device attempts/tries todecode DCI using one or more search spaces. The base station mayconfigure a size and a location of the CORESET in the time-frequencydomain. A first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 may occur or maybe set/configured at the first symbol in a slot. The first CORESET 1401may overlap with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain. Athird CORESET 1403 may occur or may be set/configured at a third symbolin the slot. A fourth CORESET 1404 may occur or may be set/configured atthe seventh symbol in the slot. CORESETs may have a different number ofresource blocks in frequency domain.

FIG. 14B shows an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping. The CCE-to-REGmapping may be performed for DCI transmission via a CORESET and PDCCHprocessing. The CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g.,for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleavedmapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interferencecoordination and/or frequency-selective transmission of controlchannels). The base station may perform different or same CCE-to-REGmapping on different CORESETs. A CORESET may be associated with aCCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., by an RRC configuration). A CORESET may beconfigured with an antenna port QCL parameter. The antenna port QCLparameter may indicate QCL information of a DM-RS for a PDCCH receptionvia the CORESET.

The base station may send/transmit, to the wireless device, one or moreRRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETsand one or more search space sets. The configuration parameters mayindicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET. Asearch space set may comprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs(e.g., at a given aggregation level). The configuration parameters mayindicate at least one of: a number of PDCCH candidates to be monitoredper aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoring periodicity and a PDCCHmonitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats to be monitored by thewireless device; and/or whether a search space set is a common searchspace set or a wireless device-specific search space set (e.g., aUE-specific search space set). A set of CCEs in the common search spaceset may be predefined and known to the wireless device. A set of CCEs inthe wireless device-specific search space set (e.g., the UE-specificsearch space set) may be configured, for example, based on the identityof the wireless device (e.g., C-RNTI).

As shown in FIG. 14B, the wireless device may determine a time-frequencyresource for a CORESET based on one or more RRC messages. The wirelessdevice may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved ornon-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET, forexample, based on configuration parameters of the CORESET. The wirelessdevice may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space setsconfigured on/for the CORESET, for example, based on the one or more RRCmessages. The wireless device may monitor a set of PDCCH candidatesaccording to configuration parameters of a search space set. Thewireless device may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or moreCORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs. Monitoring may comprisedecoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidatesaccording to the monitored DCI formats. Monitoring may comprise decodingDCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (orconfigured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats(e.g., the number of CCEs, the number of PDCCH candidates in commonsearch spaces, and/or the number of PDCCH candidates in the wirelessdevice-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats.The decoding may be referred to as blind decoding. The wireless devicemay determine DCI as valid for the wireless device, for example, afteror in response to CRC checking (e.g., scrambled bits for CRC parity bitsof the DCI matching an RNTI value). The wireless device may processinformation comprised in the DCI (e.g., a scheduling assignment, anuplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlinkpreemption, and/or the like).

The may send/transmit uplink control signaling (e.g., UCI) to a basestation. The uplink control signaling may comprise HARQ acknowledgementsfor received DL-SCH transport blocks. The wireless device maysend/transmit the HARQ acknowledgements, for example, after or inresponse to receiving a DL-SCH transport block. Uplink control signalingmay comprise CSI indicating a channel quality of a physical downlinkchannel. The wireless device may send/transmit the CSI to the basestation. The base station, based on the received CSI, may determinetransmission format parameters (e.g., comprising multi-antenna andbeamforming schemes) for downlink transmission(s). Uplink controlsignaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR). The wireless device maysend/transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is available fortransmission to the base station. The wireless device may send/transmitUCI (e.g., HARQ acknowledgements (HARQ-ACK), CSI report, SR, and thelike) via a PUCCH or a PUSCH. The wireless device may send/transmit theuplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats.

There may be multiple PUCCH formats (e.g., five PUCCH formats). Awireless device may determine a PUCCH format, for example, based on asize of UCI (e.g., a quantity/number of uplink symbols of UCItransmission and a number of UCI bits). PUCCH format 0 may have a lengthof one or two OFDM symbols and may comprise two or fewer bits. Thewireless device may send/transmit UCI via a PUCCH resource, for example,using PUCCH format 0 if the transmission is over/via one or two symbolsand the quantity/number of HARQ-ACK information bits with positive ornegative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is one or two. PUCCH format 1 may occupya number of OFDM symbols (e.g., between four and fourteen OFDM symbols)and may comprise two or fewer bits. The wireless device may use PUCCHformat 1, for example, if the transmission is over/via four or moresymbols and the number of HARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two. PUCCH format 2may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may comprise more than two bits.The wireless device may use PUCCH format 2, for example, if thetransmission is over/via one or two symbols and the quantity/number ofUCI bits is two or more. PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number of OFDMsymbols (e.g., between four and fourteen OFDM symbols) and may comprisemore than two bits. The wireless device may use PUCCH format 3, forexample, if the transmission is four or more symbols, thequantity/number of UCI bits is two or more, and the PUCCH resource doesnot comprise an orthogonal cover code (OCC). PUCCH format 4 may occupy anumber of OFDM symbols (e.g., between four and fourteen OFDM symbols)and may comprise more than two bits. The wireless device may use PUCCHformat 4, for example, if the transmission is four or more symbols, thequantity/number of UCI bits is two or more, and the PUCCH resourcecomprises an OCC.

The base station may send/transmit configuration parameters to thewireless device for a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, for example,using an RRC message. The plurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g., up tofour sets in NR, or up to any other quantity of sets in other systems)may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell. A PUCCH resource set maybe configured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCHresources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resourceidentifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximumnumber) of UCI information bits the wireless device may send/transmitusing one of the plurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set.The wireless device may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resourcesets, for example, based on a total bit length of the UCI informationbits (e.g., HARQ-ACK, SR, and/or CSI) if configured with a plurality ofPUCCH resource sets. The wireless device may select a first PUCCHresource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0,” forexample, if the total bit length of UCI information bits is two orfewer. The wireless device may select a second PUCCH resource set havinga PUCCH resource set index equal to “1,” for example, if the total bitlength of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than orequal to a first configured value. The wireless device may select athird PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2,”for example, if the total bit length of UCI information bits is greaterthan the first configured value and less than or equal to a secondconfigured value. The wireless device may select a fourth PUCCH resourceset having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3,” for example, if thetotal bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the secondconfigured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406,1706, or any other quantity of bits).

The wireless device may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCHresource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission, forexample, after determining a PUCCH resource set from a plurality ofPUCCH resource sets. The wireless device may determine the PUCCHresource, for example, based on a PUCCH resource indicator in DCI (e.g.,with DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on/via a PDCCH. An n-bit(e.g., a three-bit) PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate oneof multiple (e.g., eight) PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. Thewireless device may send/transmit the UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI and/or SR)using a PUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in theDCI, for example, based on the PUCCH resource indicator.

FIG. 15A shows an example communications between a wireless device and abase station. A wireless device 1502 and a base station 1504 may be partof a communication network, such as the communication network 100 shownin FIG. 1A, the communication network 150 shown in FIG. 1B, or any othercommunication network. A communication network may comprise more thanone wireless device and/or more than one base station, withsubstantially the same or similar configurations as those shown in FIG.15A.

The base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a corenetwork (not shown) via radio communications over the air interface (orradio interface) 1506. The communication direction from the base station1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 may bereferred to as the downlink. The communication direction from thewireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface maybe referred to as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separatedfrom uplink transmissions, for example, using various duplex schemes(e.g., FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the duplexing techniques).

For the downlink, data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from thebase station 1504 may be provided/transferred/sent to the processingsystem 1508 of the base station 1504. The data may beprovided/transferred/sent to the processing system 1508 by, for example,a core network. For the uplink, data to be sent to the base station 1504from the wireless device 1502 may be provided/transferred/sent to theprocessing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502. The processingsystem 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 andlayer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission. Layer 2may comprise an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer,for example, described with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, andFIG. 4A. Layer 3 may comprise an RRC layer, for example, described withrespect to FIG. 2B.

The data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may beprovided/transferred/sent to a transmission processing system 1510 ofbase station 1504, for example, after being processed by the processingsystem 1508. The data to be sent to base station 1504 may beprovided/transferred/sent to a transmission processing system 1520 ofthe wireless device 1502, for example, after being processed by theprocessing system 1518. The transmission processing system 1510 and thetransmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSIfunctionality. Layer 1 may comprise a PHY layer, for example, describedwith respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For transmitprocessing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, forward errorcorrection coding of transport channels, interleaving, rate matching,mapping of transport channels to physical channels, modulation ofphysical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) or multi-antennaprocessing, and/or the like.

A reception processing system 1512 of the base station 1504 may receivethe uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502. The receptionprocessing system 1512 of the base station 1504 may comprise one or moreTRPs. A reception processing system 1522 of the wireless device 1502 mayreceive the downlink transmission from the base station 1504. Thereception processing system 1522 of the wireless device 1502 maycomprise one or more antenna panels. The reception processing system1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSIfunctionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer, for example, describedwith respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For receiveprocessing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, error detection,forward error correction decoding, deinterleaving, demapping oftransport channels to physical channels, demodulation of physicalchannels, MIMO or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.

The base station 1504 may comprise multiple antennas (e.g., multipleantenna panels, multiple TRPs, etc.). The wireless device 1502 maycomprise multiple antennas (e.g., multiple antenna panels, etc.). Themultiple antennas may be used to perform one or more MIMO ormulti-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g.,single-user MIMO or multi-user MIMO), transmit/receive diversity, and/orbeamforming. The wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 mayhave a single antenna.

The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may beassociated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively. Memory1514 and memory 1524 (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readablemediums) may store computer program instructions or code that may beexecuted by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system1518, respectively, to carry out one or more of the functionalities(e.g., one or more functionalities described herein and otherfunctionalities of general computers, processors, memories, and/or otherperipherals). The transmission processing system 1510 and/or thereception processing system 1512 may be coupled to the memory 1514and/or another memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computerreadable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that maybe executed to carry out one or more of their respectivefunctionalities. The transmission processing system 1520 and/or thereception processing system 1522 may be coupled to the memory 1524and/or another memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computerreadable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that maybe executed to carry out one or more of their respectivefunctionalities.

The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 maycomprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors. The oneor more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, forexample, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP),a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), afield programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logicdevice, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardwarecomponents, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof. The processingsystem 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least oneof signal coding/processing, data processing, power control,input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enablethe wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 to operate in awireless environment.

The processing system 1508 may be connected to one or more peripherals1516. The processing system 1518 may be connected to one or moreperipherals 1526. The one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or moreperipherals 1526 may comprise software and/or hardware that providefeatures and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, akeypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver,a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequencymodulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, anelectronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or moresensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, aradar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, acamera, and/or the like). The processing system 1508 and/or theprocessing system 1518 may receive input data (e.g., user input data)from, and/or provide output data (e.g., user output data) to, the one ormore peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526. Theprocessing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive powerfrom a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power tothe other components in the wireless device 1502. The power source maycomprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solarcell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof. The processing system1508 may be connected to a Global Positioning System (GPS) chipset 1517.The processing system 1518 may be connected to a Global PositioningSystem (GPS) chipset 1527. The GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527may be configured to determine and provide geographic locationinformation of the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504,respectively.

FIG. 15B shows example elements of a computing device that may be usedto implement any of the various devices described herein, including, forexample, the base station 160A, 160B, 162A, 162B, 220, and/or 1504, thewireless device 106, 156A, 156B, 210, and/or 1502, or any other basestation, wireless device, AMF, UPF, network device, or computing devicedescribed herein. The computing device 1530 may include one or moreprocessors 1531, which may execute instructions stored in therandom-access memory (RAM) 1533, the removable media 1534 (such as aUniversal Serial Bus (USB) drive, compact disk (CD) or digital versatiledisk (DVD), or floppy disk drive), or any other desired storage medium.Instructions may also be stored in an attached (or internal) hard drive1535. The computing device 1530 may also include a security processor(not shown), which may execute instructions of one or more computerprograms to monitor the processes executing on the processor 1531 andany process that requests access to any hardware and/or softwarecomponents of the computing device 1530 (e.g., ROM 1532, RAM 1533, theremovable media 1534, the hard drive 1535, the device controller 1537, anetwork interface 1539, a GPS 1541, a Bluetooth interface 1542, a WiFiinterface 1543, etc.). The computing device 1530 may include one or moreoutput devices, such as the display 1536 (e.g., a screen, a displaydevice, a monitor, a television, etc.), and may include one or moreoutput device controllers 1537, such as a video processor. There mayalso be one or more user input devices 1538, such as a remote control,keyboard, mouse, touch screen, microphone, etc. The computing device1530 may also include one or more network interfaces, such as a networkinterface 1539, which may be a wired interface, a wireless interface, ora combination of the two. The network interface 1539 may provide aninterface for the computing device 1530 to communicate with a network1540 (e.g., a RAN, or any other network). The network interface 1539 mayinclude a modem (e.g., a cable modem), and the external network 1540 mayinclude communication links, an external network, an in-home network, aprovider's wireless, coaxial, fiber, or hybrid fiber/coaxialdistribution system (e.g., a DOCSIS network), or any other desirednetwork. Additionally, the computing device 1530 may include alocation-detecting device, such as a global positioning system (GPS)microprocessor 1541, which may be configured to receive and processglobal positioning signals and determine, with possible assistance froman external server and antenna, a geographic position of the computingdevice 1530.

The example in FIG. 15B may be a hardware configuration, although thecomponents shown may be implemented as software as well. Modificationsmay be made to add, remove, combine, divide, etc. components of thecomputing device 1530 as desired. Additionally, the components may beimplemented using basic computing devices and components, and the samecomponents (e.g., processor 1531, ROM storage 1532, display 1536, etc.)may be used to implement any of the other computing devices andcomponents described herein. For example, the various componentsdescribed herein may be implemented using computing devices havingcomponents such as a processor executing computer-executableinstructions stored on a computer-readable medium, as shown in FIG. 15B.Some or all of the entities described herein may be software based, andmay co-exist in a common physical platform (e.g., a requesting entitymay be a separate software process and program from a dependent entity,both of which may be executed as software on a common computing device).

FIG. 16A shows an example structure for uplink transmission. Processingof a baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel maycomprise/perform one or more functions. The one or more functions maycomprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits togenerate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valuedmodulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transformprecoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of thecomplex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols toresource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain SingleCarrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA), CP-OFDM signal foran antenna port, or any other signals; and/or the like. An SC-FDMAsignal for uplink transmission may be generated, for example, iftransform precoding is enabled. A CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmissionmay be generated, for example, if transform precoding is not enabled(e.g., as shown in FIG. 16A). These functions are examples and othermechanisms for uplink transmission may be implemented.

FIG. 16B shows an example structure for modulation and up-conversion ofa baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be acomplex-valued SC-FDMA, CP-OFDM baseband signal (or any other basebandsignals) for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical RandomAccess Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may beperformed/employed, for example, prior to transmission.

FIG. 16C shows an example structure for downlink transmissions.Processing of a baseband signal representing a physical downlink channelmay comprise/perform one or more functions. The one or more functionsmay comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to besent/transmitted on/via a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bitsto generate complex-valued modulation symbols; mapping of thecomplex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmissionlayers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layerfor transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valuedmodulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generationof complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/orthe like. These functions are examples and other mechanisms for downlinktransmission may be implemented.

FIG. 16D shows an example structure for modulation and up-conversion ofa baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be acomplex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port or any othersignal. Filtering may be performed/employed, for example, prior totransmission.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, one or more messages(e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a pluralityof cells (e.g., a primary cell, one or more secondary cells). Thewireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g.,two or more base stations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality ofcells. The one or more messages (e.g. as a part of the configurationparameters) may comprise parameters of PHY, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRClayers for configuring the wireless device. The configuration parametersmay comprise parameters for configuring PHY and MAC layer channels,bearers, etc. The configuration parameters may comprise parametersindicating values of timers for PHY, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers,and/or communication channels.

A timer may begin running, for example, once it is started and continuerunning until it is stopped or until it expires. A timer may be started,for example, if it is not running or restarted if it is running A timermay be associated with a value (e.g., the timer may be started orrestarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire once itreaches the value). The duration of a timer may not be updated, forexample, until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g., due to BWPswitching). A timer may be used to measure a time period/window for aprocess. With respect to an implementation and/or procedure related toone or more timers or other parameters, it will be understood that theremay be multiple ways to implement the one or more timers or otherparameters. One or more of the multiple ways to implement a timer may beused to measure a time period/window for the procedure. A random accessresponse window timer may be used for measuring a window of time forreceiving a random access response. The time difference between two timestamps may be used, for example, instead of starting a random accessresponse window timer and determine the expiration of the timer. Aprocess for measuring a time window may be restarted, for example, if atimer is restarted. Other example implementations may beconfigured/provided to restart a measurement of a time window.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more soundingreference signal (SRS) resource sets. The base station may configure thewireless device with one or more SRS resource sets, for example, using ahigher layer parameter (e.g., SRS-ResourceSet). The base station mayconfigure the wireless device with one or more SRS resources for an SRSresource set of the one or more SRS resource sets, for example, using ahigher layer parameter (e.g., SRS-Resource). The wireless device mayindicate, to the base station, a maximum quantity of the one or more SRSresources (e.g., using a parameter, such as SRS_capability). The basestation may configure an applicability of the SRS resource set using ahigher layer parameter (e.g., usage) in a higher layer parameter (e.g.,SRS-ResourceSet).

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), at a given time instant,one SRS resource of the one or more SRS resources in each SRS resourceset (e.g., simultaneously or substantially simultaneously), for example,if the higher layer parameter usage is set to BeamManagement. Thewireless device may determine that the one SRS resource of the one ormore SRS resources in each SRS resource set may have a same time domainbehavior in a same BWP (e.g., uplink BWP). The wireless device maytransmit the one SRS resource of the one or more SRS resources in eachSRS resource set in the same BWP simultaneously (or substantiallysimultaneously), for example, based on the determining.

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), at a given time instant,only one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resource sets(e.g., simultaneously or substantially simultaneously), for example, ifthe higher layer parameter usage is set to an indication for beammanagement (e.g., BeamManagement). The wireless device may determinethat the only one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resourcesets may have the same time domain behavior in a same BWP (e.g., uplinkBWP). The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the only one SRSresource in each of the one or more SRS resource sets in the same BWPsimultaneously (or substantially simultaneously), for example, based onthe determining.

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), at a given time instant,one SRS resource in each of one or more SRS resource sets simultaneously(or substantially simultaneously), for example, if the higher layerparameter usage is set to BeamManagement. The wireless device maydetermine that the one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRSresource sets may have the same time domain behavior in a same BWP(e.g., uplink BWP). The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) theone SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resource sets in thesame BWP simultaneously (or substantially simultaneously), for example,based on the determining.

The one or more SRS resource sets may comprise a first SRS resource setand a second SRS resource set. The first SRS resource set may compriseone or more first SRS resources. The one or more first SRS resources maycomprise a first SRS resource and a second SRS resource. The second SRSresource set may comprise one or more second SRS resources. The one ormore second SRS resources may comprise a third SRS resource and a fourthSRS resource. The one or more first SRS resource set and/or the one ormore second SRS resource set many comprise any quantity of SRSresources. The one or more first SRS resources and/or the one or moresecond SRS resources may comprise any quantity of SRS resources.

A first time domain behavior of the first SRS resource and a third timedomain behavior of the third SRS resource may be the same/substantiallythe same (or may be different) in a BWP. The wireless device may send(e.g., transmit) the first SRS resource of the first SRS resource setand the third SRS resource of the second SRS resource set simultaneously(or substantially simultaneously) in a BWP, for example, based on thehigher layer parameter usage being set to BeamManagement and/or based onthe first time domain behavior of the first SRS resource and the thirdtime domain behavior of the third SRS resource being the same (orsubstantially the same).

A first time domain behavior of the first SRS resource and a fourth timedomain behavior of the fourth SRS resource may be different (or may bethe same or substantially the same) in a BWP. The wireless device maynot send (e.g., transmit) (e.g., may refrain from the transmitting) thefirst SRS resource of the first SRS resource set and the fourth SRSresource of the second SRS resource set simultaneously (or substantiallysimultaneously) in a BWP, for example, based on the higher layerparameter usage being set to BeamManagement and/or based on the firsttime domain behavior of the first SRS resource and the fourth timedomain behavior of the fourth SRS resource being different.

A second time domain behavior of the second SRS resource and a fourthtime domain behavior of the fourth SRS resource may be thesame/substantially the same (or may be different) in a BWP. The wirelessdevice may send (e.g., transmit) the second SRS resource of the firstSRS resource set and the fourth SRS resource of the second SRS resourceset simultaneously in a BWP, for example, based on the higher layerparameter usage being set to BeamManagement and/or based on the secondtime domain behavior of the second SRS resource and the fourth timedomain behavior of the fourth SRS resource being the same (orsubstantially the same).

A second time domain behavior of the second SRS resource and a thirdtime domain behavior of the third SRS resource may be different (or maybe same or substantially the same) in a BWP. The wireless device may notsend/transmit (e.g., may refrain from transmitting) the second SRSresource of the first SRS resource set and the third SRS resource of thesecond SRS resource set simultaneously (or substantially simultaneously)in a BWP, for example, based on the higher layer parameter usage beingset to BeamManagement and/or based on the second time domain behavior ofthe second SRS resource and the third time domain behavior of the thirdSRS resource being different.

A higher layer parameter (e.g., SRS-Resource) may configure,semi-statically, various parameters. For example, the higher layerparameter (e.g., SRS-Resource) may configure at least one of: an SRSresource indicator/index (SRI) (e.g., provided by a higher layerparameter srs-ResourceId) indicating a configuration of an SRS resource,a time domain behavior of the configuration of the SRS resource (e.g.,indicated by a higher layer parameter resourceType), an SRS sequenceindicator/ID (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter sequenceId);and a configuration of a spatial relation between a reference referencesignal (RS) and a target SRS (e.g., as indicated by the SRS resourceindicator/index). The base station may configure the wireless devicewith a higher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo). The higherlayer parameter spatialRelationInfo may comprise an indicator/ID of thereference RS. The time domain behavior of an SRS resource may correspondto a periodic transmission, a semi-persistent transmission, or anaperiodic SRS transmission. The time domain behavior of an SRS resourcemay comprise one or more of a transmission periodicity, a transmissionoffset of the SRS resource, etc.

The wireless device may determine that a higher layer parameter (e.g.,servingCellId) indicating a serving cell may be present in the higherlayer parameter spatialRelationInfo. The wireless device may determinethat the reference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS)configured on the serving cell, for example, based on the determiningthat the higher layer parameter indicating a serving cell may be presentin the higher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo.

The wireless device may determine that a higher layer parameter (e.g.,uplinkBWP) indicating an uplink BWP and a higher layer parameter (e.g.,servingCellId) indicating a serving cell may be present in the higherlayer parameter spatialRelationInfo. The wireless device may determinethat the reference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SRS) configured on theuplink BWP of the serving cell, for example, based on determining that ahigher layer parameter (e.g., uplinkBWP) indicating an uplink BWP,and/or a first higher layer parameter (e.g., servingCellId) indicating aserving cell may be present in a second higher layer parameter (e.g.,spatialRelationInfo).

The base station may configure the target SRS on a serving cell. Thewireless device may determine that a higher layer parameter (e.g.,servingCellId) may be absent in the higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo. The wireless device may determine that thereference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS) configuredon the serving cell, for example, based on the determining that a firsthigher layer parameter (e.g., servingCellId) is not present in a secondhigher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo).

The base station may configure the target SRS on a serving cell. Thewireless device may determine that a higher layer parameter (e.g.,servingCellId) is absent and a higher layer parameter (e.g., uplinkBWP)indicating an uplink BWP is present in the higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo. The wireless device may determine that thereference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SRS) configured on the uplink BWPthe serving cell, for example, based on the determining that a firsthigher layer parameter (e.g., servingCellId) is absent and a secondhigher layer parameter (e.g., uplinkBWP) is present in a third higherlayer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo).

A wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a PUSCH transmission and aSRS in a same slot. The base station may configure the wireless deviceto transmit the SRS after (or before) the PUSCH transmission (and thecorresponding DM-RS), for example, based on the PUSCH transmission andthe SRS transmission being in the same slot.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more SRSresource configurations. A higher layer parameter (e.g., resourceType)in a higher layer parameter SRS-Resource may indicate a periodic timedomain behavior. The base station may configure the wireless device witha higher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo). The higher layerparameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo) may comprise an indicator/ID of areference RS (e.g., ssb-Index, csi-RS-Index, srs).

The reference RS may comprise a variety of RSs. For example, thereference RS may comprise a SS/PBCH block. The reference RS may comprisea CSI-RS (e.g., periodic CSI-RS, semi-persistent CSI-RS, aperiodicCSI-RS). The wireless device may use a spatial domain receiving filterto receive the reference RS. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) a target SRS resource using a spatial domain transmissionfilter that is the same as (or substantially the same as) the spatialdomain receiving filter, for example, based on a higher layer parameter(e.g., spatialRelationInfo) indicating that the reference RS (e.g., bythe ID of the reference RS) is the SS/PBCH block or the CSI-RS. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a target SRS resource with thespatial domain receiving filter, for example, based on a higher layerparameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo) indicating the reference RS (e.g.,by the ID of the reference RS).

The reference RS may be an SRS (e.g., periodic SRS, semi-persistent SRS,aperiodic SRS). The wireless device may use a spatial domaintransmission filter to send (e.g., transmit) the reference RS. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a target SRS resource with thespatial domain transmission filter, for example, based on a higher layerparameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo) indicating that the reference RS(e.g., by the ID of the reference RS) is the SRS.

The base station may activate and/or deactivate one or more configuredSRS resource sets (e.g., semi-persistent SRS resource sets) of a servingcell. The base station may activate and/or deactivate one or moreconfigured SRS resource sets (e.g., semi-persistent SRS resource sets)of a serving cell, for example, by sending a semi persistent (SP) SRSactivation/deactivation MAC CE. The one or more configured SRS resourcesets may be initially deactivated upon configuration. The one or moreconfigured SRS resource sets may be deactivated, for example, after ahandover.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more SRSresource sets (e.g., semi-persistent SRS resource sets). A first higherlayer parameter (e.g., resourceType) in a second higher layer parameter(e.g., SRS-Resource) may indicate a semi-persistent time-domainbehavior. The wireless device may receive, from the base station, anactivation command (e.g., an SP SRS activation/deactivation MAC CE) foran SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets. A PDSCHtransmission may comprise the activation command. The wireless devicemay send (e.g., transmit) a HARQ-ACK message corresponding to the PDSCHtransmission in a slot n. The wireless device may use/apply one or moreassumptions/actions for an SRS transmission of the SRS resource setstarting from the slot n+3N_(slot) ^(subframe,μ)+1, for example, basedon sending/transmitting the HARQ-ACK message. The activation command maycomprise one or more spatial relation assumptions for one or more SRSresources of the SRS resource set. A first field (e.g., a resource Idifield) in the activation command may comprise an indicator/identifier ofa resource (e.g., SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS, SRS) used for spatialrelationship derivation for an SRS resource of the one or more SRSresources. The one or more spatial relation assumptions may be providedby a list of references to one or more reference signal indicators/IDs(e.g., SSB-Index, SRS-ResourceId, etc.). One reference signalindicator/ID may be provided per SRS resource of the (activated) SRSresource set. A spatial relation assumption of the one or more spatialrelation assumptions may be provided by a reference to an indicator/IDof a reference RS. The reference RS may be a SS/PBCH block, an NZPCSI-RS resource, or a SRS.

A field (e.g., a resource serving cell indicator/ID field) indicating aserving cell may be present in the activation command. The reference RSmay be an SS/PBCH block resource or an NZP CSI-RS resource. Thereference RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS resource) may beconfigured on the serving cell, for example, based on the resourceserving cell indicator/ID field being present and/or the reference RSbeing the SS/PBCH block resource or the NZP CSI-RS resource.

The base station may configure the (activated) SRS resource set on aserving cell. A resource serving cell ID field may be absent in theactivation command. The reference RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RSresource) may be configured on the serving cell, for example, based onthe resource serving cell ID field not being present in the activationcommand and the base station configuring the SRS resource set on theserving cell.

A resource serving cell ID field indicating a serving cell and aresource BWP indicator/ID field indicating an uplink BWP may be presentin the activation command. The reference RS (e.g., SRS resource) may beconfigured on the uplink BWP of the serving cell, for example, based onthe resource serving cell ID field and/or the resource BWP ID fieldbeing present in the activation command.

The base station may configure the SRS resource set on an uplink BWP ofa serving cell. A resource serving Cell ID field and a resource BWP IDfield may be absent in the activation command. The reference RS (e.g.,SRS resource) may be configured on the uplink BWP of the serving cell,for example, based on the resource serving cell ID field and theResource BWP ID field not being present in the activation command and/orthe SRS resource set being configured on the uplink BWP of the servingcell.

The base station may configure an SRS resource in the (activated) SRSresource set with a higher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo).The wireless device may assume/determine that a reference RS (e.g.,indicated by an indicator/ID of the reference RS) in the activationcommand overrides a second reference RS configured in a higher layerparameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo), for example, if the SRS resource,in the (activated) SRS resource set, is configured with the higher layerparameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo).

The wireless device may receive, from the base station, a deactivationcommand (e.g., an SP SRS activation/deactivation MAC CE) for an(activated) SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets. APDSCH transmission may comprise the deactivation command. The wirelessdevice may send (e.g., transmit) a HARQ-ACK message corresponding to thePDSCH transmission in a slot n. The wireless device may use/apply one ormore assumptions/actions for a cessation of an SRS transmission of the(deactivated) SRS resource set starting from the slot n+3N_(slot)^(subframe,μ)+1, for example, based on the sending/transmitting theHARQ-ACK corresponding to the PDSCH transmission.

A wireless device may activate a semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration on an uplink BWP of a serving cell, for example, based onreceiving, from a base station, an activation command for thesemi-persistent SRS resource configuration. The wireless device may notreceive, from the base station, a deactivation command for thesemi-persistent SRS resource configuration.

The uplink BWP may be an active uplink BWP of the serving cell. Thewireless device may consider/determine that the semi-persistent SRSresource configuration is active, for example, based on the uplink BWPbeing the active uplink BWP of the serving cell and/or based on notreceiving the deactivation command for the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an SRStransmission, via the uplink BWP of the serving cell, based on thesemi-persistent SRS resource configuration, for example, based onconsidering/determining that the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration is active.

The uplink BWP may not be an active uplink BWP of the serving cell. Theuplink BWP not being the active uplink BWP may correspond to the uplinkBWP being deactivated in the serving cell. The wireless device maydetermine/assume that the semi-persistent SRS configuration is suspendedin the UL BWP of the serving cell, for example, based on not receivingthe deactivation command for the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration and the uplink BWP being deactivated. The semi-persistentSRS configuration being suspended in the UL BWP may comprise that thewireless device may reactivate the semi-persistent SRS configuration ifthe UL BWP becomes an active UL BWP of the serving cell.

A first SRS resource of an SRS resource set may have a first time domainbehavior (e.g., periodic, semi-persistent, aperiodic). A second SRSresource of the SRS resource set may have a second time domain behavior(e.g., periodic, semi-persistent, aperiodic). The wireless device mayassume/expect/determine that the first time domain behavior and thesecond time behavior are the same (or substantially the same), forexample, based on the first SRS resource and the second SRS resourcebeing in the (same) SRS resource set. The wireless device may notassume/expect/determine that the first time domain behavior and thesecond time behavior are different, for example, based on the first SRSresource and the second SRS resource being in the (same) SRS resourceset.

An SRS resource of an SRS resource set may have a first time domainbehavior (e.g., periodic, semi-persistent, aperiodic). The SRS resourceset may have a second time domain behavior (e.g., periodic,semi-persistent, aperiodic). The wireless device may expect/determinethat the first time domain behavior and the second time behavior are thesame, for example, based on the SRS resource being associated with theSRS resource set. The wireless device may not expect/determine that thefirst time domain behavior and the second time behavior are different,for example, based on the SRS resource and the SRS resource set beingassociated. The SRS resource being associated with the SRS resource setmay correspond to the SRS resource set comprising the SRS resource. TheSRS resource being associated with the SRS resource set may correspondto the SRS resource being an element of the SRS resource set.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a PUCCH on at leastone first symbol on a carrier (e.g., supplementary UL (SUL) carrier,normal UL (NUL) carrier). A PUCCH transmission may carry/comprise one ormore CSI reports. The PUCCH transmission may carry/comprise one or moreL1-RSRP reports. The PUCCH transmission may carry/comprise a HARQ-ACKmessage and/or a scheduling request (SR). The base station may configurethe wireless device with an SRS configuration on the carrier. The SRSconfiguration may be a semi-persistent SRS configuration. The SRSconfiguration may be a periodic SRS configuration. The wireless devicemay determine that the PUCCH transmission and an SRS transmissioncorresponding to the SRS configuration overlap in at least one symbol.The wireless device may determine that at least one first symbol of thePUCCH transmission and at least one second symbol of the SRStransmission of the SRS configuration may overlap in the at least onesymbol. The wireless device may not perform the SRS transmission, on thecarrier, on the at least one symbol, for example, based on thedetermining.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a PUCCH on at leastone first symbol on a carrier (e.g., SUL carrier, NUL carrier). A PUCCHtransmission may comprise a HARQ-ACK message and/or an SR. The basestation may trigger an SRS configuration on the carrier. The SRSconfiguration may be an aperiodic SRS configuration. The wireless devicemay determine that the PUCCH transmission and an SRS transmissioncorresponding to the SRS configuration overlap in at least one symbol.The wireless device may determine that at least one first symbol of thePUCCH transmission and at least one second symbol of the SRStransmission of the SRS configuration may overlap in the at least onesymbol. The wireless device may not perform the SRS transmission, on thecarrier, on the at least one symbol, for example, based on thedetermining.

The not performing the SRS transmission may comprise dropping the SRStransmission on the at least one symbol. The wireless device may performthe SRS transmission on at least one third symbol of the at least onesecond symbol. The at least one third symbol may not overlap with the atleast one symbol.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a PUCCH on at leastone first symbol on a carrier (e.g., SUL carrier, NUL carrier). A PUCCHtransmission may carry/comprise one or more semi-persistent CSI reports.The PUCCH transmission may carry/comprise one or more periodic CSIreports. The PUCCH transmission may carry/comprise one or moresemi-persistent L1-RSRP reports. The PUCCH transmission may comprise oneor more periodic L1-RSRP reports. The base station may trigger an SRSconfiguration on the carrier. The SRS configuration may be an aperiodicSRS configuration. The wireless device may determine that the PUCCHtransmission and an SRS transmission corresponding to the SRSconfiguration overlap in at least one symbol. The wireless device maydetermine that at least one first symbol of the PUCCH transmission andat least one second symbol of the SRS transmission corresponding to theSRS (e.g., an aperiodic SRS configuration) may overlap in the at leastone symbol. The wireless device may not send/transmit the PUCCHtransmission, on the carrier, on the at least one symbol, for example,based on the determining.

A wireless device may or may not send (e.g., transmit) an SRS and aPUCCH transmission/PUSCH transmission simultaneously (or substantiallysimultaneously), for example, in an intra-band carrier aggregation (CA)or in an inter-band CA band-band combination. A base station may or maynot configure the wireless device with an SRS transmission from a firstcarrier and a PUCCH transmission/PUSCH transmission (e.g., a PUSCHformat, a UL DM-RS format, a UL PT-RS format, or a PUCCH format) in asecond carrier in the same symbol. The first carrier may be differentfrom the second carrier.

A wireless device may or may not send (e.g., transmit) an SRS and aPRACH transmission simultaneously (or substantially simultaneously), forexample, in an intra-band carrier aggregation or in an inter-band CAband-band combination. The wireless device may or may not send/transmitan SRS from a first carrier and a PRACH from a second carriersimultaneously. The first carrier may be different from the secondcarrier.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a periodic SRStransmission on at least one symbol (e.g., an OFDM symbol). The basestation may configure an SRS resource with a higher layer parameter(e.g., resourceType) indicating an aperiodic time-domain behavior. Thebase station may trigger the SRS resource on the at least one symbol.The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the (aperiodic) SRSresource on the at least one (overlapped) symbol, for example, based onthe SRS resource being triggered on the at least one symbol configuredwith a periodic SRS transmission. The wireless device may or may notperform a periodic SRS transmission on the at least one symbol, forexample, based on the SRS resource being triggered on the at least onesymbol configured with a periodic SRS transmission. The not performingthe periodic SRS transmission may comprise that the wireless device maynot send/transmit (e.g., refrain from sending/transmitting) an SRSassociated with the periodic SRS transmission on the at least one(overlapped) symbol.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a semi-persistentSRS transmission on at least one symbol (e.g., OFDM symbol). The basestation may configure an SRS resource with a higher layer parameter(e.g., resourceType) indicating an aperiodic time domain behavior. Thebase station may trigger the SRS resource on the at least one symbol.The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the (aperiodic) SRSresource on the at least one (overlapped) symbol, for example, based onthe SRS resource being triggered on the at least one symbol configuredwith the semi-persistent SRS transmission. The wireless device may ormay not perform the semi-persistent SRS transmission on the at least onesymbol, for example, based on the SRS resource being triggered on the atleast one symbol configured with the semi-persistent SRS transmission.The not performing the semi-persistent SRS transmission may comprisethat the wireless device may not send/transmit (e.g., refrain fromsending/transmitting) an SRS associated with the semi-persistent SRStransmission on the at least one (overlapped) symbol.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a periodic SRStransmission on at least one symbol (e.g., OFDM symbol). The basestation may configure an SRS resource with a higher layer parameter(e.g., resourceType) indicating a semi-persistent time-domain behavior.The base station may trigger the SRS resource on the at least onesymbol. The wireless device may transmit the (semi-persistent) SRSresource on the at least one (overlapped) symbol, for example, based onthe SRS resource being triggered on the at least one symbol configuredwith the periodic SRS transmission. The wireless device may or may notperform the periodic SRS transmission on the at least one symbol, forexample, based on the SRS resource being triggered on the at least onesymbol configured with the periodic SRS transmission. The not performingthe periodic SRS transmission may comprise that the wireless device maynot send/transmit (e.g., refrain from sending/transmitting) an SRSassociated with the periodic SRS transmission on the at least one(overlapped) symbol.

Two transmission schemes may be supported for a PUSCH transmission:codebook-based transmission and non-codebook-based transmission. Awireless device may be configured with a codebook-based transmission,for example, if a higher layer parameter (e.g., txConfig inpusch-Config) is set to codebook. A wireless device may be configuredwith a non-codebook-based transmission, for example, if the higher layerparameter (e.g., txConfig) is set to nonCodebook. If the higher layerparameter txConfig is not configured, the wireless device may not beexpected to be scheduled by DCI format 0_1. The wireless device may notexpect to be scheduled for a PUSCH transmission by DCI (e.g., with DCIformat 0_0) in a BWP without a configured PUCCH resource withPUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo in frequency range 2 in RRC connected mode.

A codebook-based PUSCH transmission may be scheduled by DCIcorresponding to DCI format 0_0, DCI format 0_1, or may besemi-statically configured. The wireless device may determine its PUSCHtransmission precoder based on SRS resource indicator/index (SRI),transmitted precoding matrix indicator (TPMI), and/or transmission rank,for example, if a PUSCH transmission is scheduled by DCI correspondingto DCI format 0_0 or is semi-statically configured. The SRI, TPMI and/orthe transmission rank may be indicated by DCI fields (e.g., an SRSresource indicator field, a precoding information field, and a number oflayers field) or indicated by higher layer parameters (e.g.,srs-ResourceIndicator and precodingAndNumberOfLayers). The wirelessdevice may be configured with at least one SRS resource, for example, ifthe wireless device is configured with the higher layer parametertxConfig set to codebook. The indicated SRI in slot n may be associatedwith the most recent transmission of an SRS resource identified by theSRI. The SRS resource may be prior to a PDCCH transmission comprisingthe SRI.

The wireless device may be configured, for codebook-based transmission,with a single higher layer parameter SRS-ResourceSet with the higherlayer parameter usage set to codebook. Only one SRS resource (or anyother quantity of SRS resources) may be indicated based on the SRIwithin the SRS resource set. The maximum quantity of configured SRSresources for codebook-based transmission may be 2 (or any otherquantity). An SRS request field in DCI may trigger a transmission ofaperiodic SRS resources, for example, if aperiodic SRS is configured fora wireless device.

A non-codebook-based PUSCH transmission may be scheduled by DCIcorresponding to DCI format 0_0, DCI format 0_1, or may besemi-statically configured. The wireless device may determine its PUSCHprecoder and transmission rank based on SRI (e.g., indicated in DCI) ifmultiple SRS resources are configured. The wireless device may use oneor multiple SRS resources for SRS transmission. The maximumquantity/number of SRS resources for simultaneous transmission in a samesymbol may be configured at the wireless device and/or may be based onthe wireless device capabilities. The simultaneously transmitted SRSresources may occupy the same RBs. Only one SRS resource set (or anyother quantity of SRS resource sets) may be configured using the higherlayer parameter usage, in SRS-ResourceSet, set to nonCodebook. Themaximum quantity of SRS resources that may be configured fornon-codebook-based uplink transmission may be 4 (or any other quantity).An indicated SRI in slot n may be associated with the most recenttransmission of SRS resource(s) identified by the SRI, where the SRStransmission is prior to a PDCCH transmission comprising the SRI. Thewireless device may be scheduled, for non-codebook-based transmission,with DCI corresponding to DCI format 0_1, for example, if at least oneSRS resource is configured in SRS-ResourceSet with the higher layerparameter usage set to nonCodebook.

Reference signals may be used to determine power for signaltransmission. A base station may send one or more indications to awireless device. The one or more indications may be used by the wirelessdevice to determine reference signals. The reference signals maycomprise pathloss reference signals.

In some types of wireless communications, such as corresponding to afirst communication protocol (e.g., compatible with 3GPP Release 15,earlier/later 3GPP releases or generations, and/or other accesstechnology), a wireless device may be configured (e.g., using RRCsignaling), by a base station, with a first quantity (e.g., four, or anyother quantity) of pathloss reference RSs. The wireless device may startmeasuring (e.g., simultaneously or substantially simultaneously) thepathloss reference RSs for a pathloss estimation (e.g., to determine atransmission power). The base station may trigger an uplinktransmission, from a wireless device, via DCI. The wireless device mayselect a pathloss reference RS indicated by the DCI (e.g., in an SRIfield), for example, to determine a transmission power for the uplinktransmission. The wireless device may select a default pathlossreference RS (e.g., a pathloss RS corresponding to an index 0) fordetermining a transmission power, for example, if the DCI corresponds toa format that does not comprise an SRI field. The default pathlossreference RS may be preset at the wireless device. However, the wirelessdevice may be unable to transmit an uplink signal using power based onan optimal pathloss reference RS, for example, if the first quantity ofpathloss reference RS is insufficient to cover an entire cell. Forexample, the location of the wireless device may not be in the directionof any of the configured pathloss reference RS such that the wirelessdevice may be required to measure pathloss reference RSs that may benon-optimal. The base station may need to transmit, to the wirelessdevice, reconfiguration parameters indicating a new set of pathlossreference RSs that are directed towards the wireless device. Suchreconfiguration parameters may be required to be transmitted by the basestation every time the location of the wireless device is changed (e.g.,beyond a threshold area). Transmission of reconfiguration parameters toa wireless device may lead to issues such as reduced spectrumefficiency, increased signaling overhead, and/or increased delay indetermining optimal power for uplink transmissions by a wireless device.

In some types of wireless communications, such as corresponding to asecond communication protocol (e.g., compatible with 3GPP Release 16,earlier/later 3GPP releases or generations, and/or other accesstechnology), a base station may configure a wireless device with asecond quantity (e.g. 64, or any other quantity) of pathloss referenceRSs using RRC signaling. The second quantity of the pathloss referenceRSs (e.g., according to the second communication protocol) may begreater than the first quantity of pathloss reference RSs (e.g.,according to the first communication protocol), thereby increasing thelikelihood of optimal coverage of the cell. However, the wireless devicemay be limited to measure a quantity of pathloss reference RSs (e.g., 4or any other quantity) that is less than the second quantity (e.g., 64or any other quantity). For example, the wireless device may be limitedto measure only the first quantity of pathloss reference RSs based onprocessing capability, power constraints, and/or other restrictions inmeasuring pathloss reference RSs. The base station may send anindication of a subset of the second quantity of pathloss reference RSsthat may be measured by the wireless device. The base station may send aMAC CE indicating a subset of the second quantity of pathloss referenceRSs. The wireless device may start measuring (e.g., simultaneously orsubstantially simultaneously) the subset of the second quantity ofpathloss reference RSs for a pathloss estimation (e.g., for determininga transmission power). Additionally or alternatively, the wirelessdevice may receive DCI scheduling an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUSCHtransmission). An SRI field in the DCI may indicate (or be mapped) to apathloss reference RS of the subset of the second plurality of pathlossreference RSs. The wireless device may determine a transmission powerfor the uplink transmission based on measuring the pathloss referenceRS. The wireless device may transmit the uplink transmission with thetransmission power based on the determining the transmission power.

In some types of wireless communications (e.g., compatible with 3GPPRelease 16, earlier/later 3GPP releases or generations, and/or otheraccess technology), a wireless device may determine (or may be required)to transmit a signal without having sufficient information to determinean appropriate transmission power. For example, the wireless device maydetermine to send/transmit an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUSCHtransmission) before receiving an indication (e.g., before receiving aMAC CE comprising the indication) of a pathloss reference, or a subsetof a total quantity of pathloss reference RSs to measure for determiningan appropriate transmission power. The wireless device may be incapableof measuring all pathloss reference RSs of the total quantity ofpathloss reference RSs (e.g., 64 or any other quantity of pathlossreference RSs), for example, based on processing capability, powerconstraints, and/or other restrictions in measuring pathloss referenceRSs. In the absence of receiving an indication of a pathloss referenceRS or a subset of pathloss reference RSs (e.g., from a base station),the wireless device may be unable to determine which pathloss referenceRS(s) is to be measured for determining a transmission power. As aresult, the wireless device may ultimately use an inappropriatetransmission power (e.g., either too high or too low). Additionally oralternatively, a base station may be unaware of a pathloss reference RS,among the total quantity of pathloss reference RSs, that the wirelessdevice may use for determining the power for an uplink transmission. Thebase station may not decode the uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCHtransmission) and/or may encounter an error in attempting to decode thePUSCH transmission, for example, if the base station is unaware of apathloss reference RS selected by the wireless device for the uplinktransmission. Inability of the base station to determine the pathlossreference RS selected at the wireless device may result inretransmission, which may lead to increased power consumption by thebase station and/or by wireless device, increased uplink interference toother cells and/or to other wireless devices, and/or increased latencyfor communications. The base station may not adjust power controlparameters (e.g., closed-loop power control parameters) for schedulingsubsequent transmissions/TBs (e.g., PUSCH TBs, PDSCH TBs), for example,if the base station is unaware of the pathloss reference RS selected, bythe wireless device, for the transmission. Not adjusting the powercontrol parameters may result in using more than a required transmissionpower (e.g., which may result in increased interference) or using lessthan a required transmission power (e.g., which may result in decodingerrors and/or reduced coverage).

Various examples herein describe enhanced pathloss reference RSdetermination. Enhanced pathloss reference RS determination may be used,for example, if the wireless device send/transmits a first message(e.g., a PUSCH transmission) using a transmission power before receivinga second message (e.g., a MAC CE) indicating a subset of a quantity ofreference RSs (e.g., pathloss reference RSs) that may beconfigured/indicated (e.g., by RRC signaling) to be measured todetermine the appropriate transmission power. The wireless device mayselect/determine a pathloss reference RS based on at least oneparameter, message, and/or condition. For example, the wireless devicemay select/determine a pathloss reference RS based on a reference signalthat is used to receive a MIB. The wireless device may select/determinea pathloss reference RS based on a reference signal that may be used ina latest/most recent random-access procedure. The wireless device mayselect a pathloss reference RS in a pathloss reference set with a lowestpathloss reference set index among pathloss reference set indices of aplurality of pathloss reference RSs sets (e.g., configured by RRCsignaling). The wireless device may select a pathloss reference RS usedfor an uplink transmission via an uplink resource associated with alowest uplink resource index among uplink resource indices correspondingto one or more uplink resources (e.g., configured by the RRC signaling).The wireless device may select/determine a pathloss reference RS basedat least one parameter, message, and/or condition that is known by boththe wireless device and a base station that is to receive a transmissionfrom the wireless using a transmission power determined based on thepathloss reference RS. Enhanced pathloss reference RS determinationdescribed herein may provide advantages such as improved power controlsignaling, reduced uplink overhead/retransmissions and interference,reduced wireless device and/or base station battery/power consumption,and/or reduces delay/latency of communication.

FIG. 17 shows an example of a power control configuration for a PUSCHtransmission. The example power control configuration comprises one ormore higher layer parameters that may be used for determination of atransmission power of the PUSCH transmission. The one or more higherlayer parameters may be indicated in one or more RRC messages sent, by abase station, to a wireless device, for example, for configuring thePUSCH transmission. Functionalities of each of higher layer parameter isdescribed with reference to FIGS. 18-25.

FIG. 18 shows example communications for transmission power control. Abase station 1808 may send, to a wireless device 1804, power controlparameters for determining transmission power (e.g., for a PUSCHtransmission, for a PUCCH transmission, etc.) at the wireless device.The wireless device 1804 may determine the transmission power (e.g., foran uplink transmission responsive to DCI) based on received powercontrol parameters.

A wireless device 1804 may receive (e.g., at or after time T₀) one ormore messages (e.g., RRC messages). The wireless device 1804 may receivethe one or more messages from a base station 1808. The one or moremessages may comprise one or more configuration parameters 1812. The oneor more configuration parameters 1812 may comprise/indicate a pluralityof power control parameter sets 1816. The plurality of power controlparameter sets 1816 may be provided by a higher layer parameter (e.g.,SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl in FIG. 17). The plurality of power controlparameter sets 1816 may correspond to (e.g., be configured for) a PUSCHtransmission via/of a cell. The plurality of power control parametersets 1816 may correspond to (e.g., be configured for) a PUCCHtransmission via/of a cell. The cell may be a primary cell (e.g.,PCell). The cell may be a secondary cell (e.g., SCell). The cell may bea secondary cell configured with PUCCH (e.g., PUCCH SCell).

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 (and/or the plurality ofpower control parameter sets 1816) may indicate/comprise power controlindicators/indices (e.g., that may be provided by a higher layerparameter SRI-PUSCH-PowerControlId described with respect to FIG. 17)for the plurality of power control parameter sets 1816. Each powercontrol parameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets1816 may be indicated/identified by (or may comprise) a respective powercontrol index of the power control indices. A first power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets 1816 maybe indicated/identified by a first power control index (e.g., powercontrol ID-1) of the power control indices. A second power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets 1816 maybe indicated/identified by a second power control index (e.g., powercontrol ID-2) of the power control indices. The first power controlindex and the second power control index may be different.

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate one or morepathloss reference RS sets 1820. The one or more pathloss RS sets 1820may be provided by a higher layer parameter (e.g.,PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS described with respect to FIG. 17). The one ormore configuration parameters 1812 may indicate one or more pathlossreference RS indicators/indices (e.g., provided by a higher layerparameter PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id described with respect to FIG.17) for the one or more pathloss reference RS sets 1820. Each pathlossreference RS set of the one or more pathloss reference RS sets 1820 maybe indicated/identified by (or may comprise) a respective pathlossreference RS indicator/index of the one or more pathloss reference RSindicators/indices. A first pathloss reference RS set (e.g., firstpathloss reference RS in FIG. 18) of the one or more pathloss referenceRS sets 1820 may be indicated/identified by (or may comprise) a firstpathloss reference RS index (e.g., pathloss reference RS ID-1) of theone or more pathloss reference RS indices. A second pathloss referenceRS set (e.g., second pathloss reference RS in FIG. 18) of the one ormore pathloss reference RS sets 1820 may be indicated/identified by (ormay comprise) a second pathloss reference RS index (e.g., pathlossreference RS ID-2 in FIG. 18) of the one or more pathloss reference RSindices. Each pathloss reference RS set of the one or more pathlossreference RS sets 1820 may indicate/comprise a respective pathlossreference RS (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterreferenceSignal, ssb-index, csi-RS-Index, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId in FIG.17). The first pathloss reference RS set of the one or more pathlossreference RS sets 1820 may indicate a first pathloss reference RS or maycomprise a first index of the first pathloss reference RS (e.g., RS-1 inFIG. 18). The second pathloss reference RS set of one or more pathlossreference RS sets 1820 may indicate a second pathloss reference RS ormay comprise a second index of the second pathloss reference RS (e.g.,RS-2 in FIG. 18).

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 (or the plurality of powercontrol parameter sets 1816) may indicate pathloss reference RSs (e.g.,RS-1 and RS-2) for the plurality of power control parameter sets 1816.Each power control parameter set of the plurality of power controlparameter sets 1816 may indicate a respective pathloss reference RS(e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS) of the pathloss reference RSs. Therespective pathloss reference RS may be indicated by a pathlossreference RS set of the one or more pathloss reference RS sets 1820.Each power control parameter set may indicate, via a pathloss referenceRS index (e.g., by sri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id in FIG. 17) in thepower control parameter set, a respective pathloss reference RS setindicating the respective pathloss reference RS. The first power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets 1816 mayindicate a first pathloss reference RS (e.g., RS-1) of the pathlossreference RSs. The first power control parameter set may indicate thefirst pathloss reference RS set (e.g., usingsri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id described with respect to FIG. 17,using pathloss reference RS ID-1 in FIG. 18, etc.) indicating the firstpathloss reference RS (e.g., RS-1 in FIG. 18). The second power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets 1816 mayindicate a second pathloss reference RS (e.g., RS-2 in FIG. 18) of thepathloss reference RSs. The second power control parameter set mayindicate the second pathloss reference RS set (e.g., usingsri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id described with respect to FIG. 17,using pathloss reference RS ID-2 in FIG. 18) indicating the secondpathloss reference RS (e.g., RS-2 in FIG. 18). The first pathlossreference RS and the second pathloss reference RS may be different. Thefirst pathloss reference RS and the second pathloss reference RS may bethe same.

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 (and/or the plurality ofpower control parameter sets 1816) may indicate/comprise pathlossreference RS indices (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id described with respect to FIG. 17) forthe plurality of power control parameter sets 1816. The one or morepathloss reference RS indices of the one or more pathloss reference RSsets 1820 may comprise the pathloss reference RS indices. Each powercontrol parameter set of the plurality of power control parameter setsmay indicate/comprise a respective pathloss reference RS index, of thepathloss reference RS indices, indicating a pathloss reference RS (e.g.,SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS, etc.). Each power control parameter set of theplurality of power control parameter sets 1816 may indicate/comprise arespective pathloss reference RS index of the pathloss reference RSindices. The respective pathloss reference RS index mayidentify/indicate a pathloss reference RS set, of the one or morepathloss reference RS sets, indicating the pathloss reference RS (e.g.,SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS, etc.). Each pathloss reference RS index of thepathloss reference RS indices may be associated with (and/or mayidentify, may indicate, and/or may be mapped to) a respective pathlossreference RS set, of the one or more pathloss reference RS sets 1820.The respective pathloss reference RS set may indicate a respectivepathloss reference RS. Each pathloss reference RS index of the pathlossreference RS indices may be mapped to the respective pathloss referenceRS set by a respective linkage. The first power control parameter set ofthe plurality of power control parameter sets 1816 may indicate/comprisea first pathloss reference RS index (e.g., pathloss reference RS ID-1),of the pathloss reference RS indices, indicating a first pathlossreference RS (e.g., RS-1). The first power control parameter set mayindicate/comprise the first pathloss reference RS index (e.g., pathlossreference RS ID-1) corresponding to (or indicating/identifying) thefirst pathloss reference RS set (e.g., first pathloss reference RS inFIG. 18) indicating the first pathloss reference RS. The second powercontrol parameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets1816 may indicate/comprise a second pathloss reference RS index (e.g.,pathloss reference RS ID-2), of the pathloss reference RS indices,indicating a second pathloss reference RS (e.g., RS-2). The second powercontrol parameter set may indicate/comprise the second pathlossreference RS index (e.g., pathloss reference RS ID-2) corresponding to(or indicating/identifying) the second pathloss reference RS set (e.g.,second pathloss reference RS in FIG. 18) indicating the second pathlossreference RS (e.g., RS-2). The first pathloss reference RS index and thesecond pathloss reference RS index may be different. The first pathlossreference RS index and the second pathloss reference RS index may be thesame.

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate one or morealpha sets 1824. The one or more alpha sets 1824 may be provided by ahigher layer parameter (e.g., P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet as shown in FIG. 17).The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate one or morealpha set indicator/indices (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterP0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId as shown in FIG. 17) for the one or more alpha sets1824. Each alpha set of the one or more alpha sets 1824 may beindicated/identified by (or may comprise) a respective alpha setindicator/index of the one or more alpha set indicators/indices. A firstalpha set of one or more alpha sets may be identified/indicates by (ormay comprise) a first alpha set indicator/index (e.g., alpha set ID-1)of the one or more alpha set indices. A second alpha set of one or morealpha sets may be identified/indicated by (or may comprise) a secondalpha set indicator/index (e.g., alpha set ID-2) of the one or morealpha set indices. Each alpha set of the one or more alpha sets mayindicate/comprise a respective power control parameter (e.g., targetpower level (p0), pathloss scaling factor (alpha)). The first alpha setof one or more alpha sets may indicate a first power control parameter(e.g., p0-1, alpha-1). The second alpha set of one or more alpha setsmay indicate a second power control parameter (e.g., p0-2, alpha-2).

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 (or the plurality of powercontrol parameter sets 1816) may indicate/comprise alpha set indices(e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter sri-P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId inFIG. 17) for the plurality of power control parameter sets. The one ormore alpha set indices of the one or more alpha sets may comprise thealpha set indices. Each power control parameter set of the plurality ofpower control parameter sets may comprise a respective alpha set index,of the alpha set indices, indicating a power control parameter (e.g.,target power level (p0), pathloss scaling factor (alpha) in FIG. 17).Each power control parameter set of the plurality of power controlparameter sets may comprise a respective alpha set index (of the alphaset indices) identifying an alpha set, of the one or more alpha sets.Each alpha set index of the alpha set indices may be associated with(and/or may identify, may indicate, and/or may be mapped to) arespective alpha set, of the one or more alpha sets, indicating a powercontrol parameter. Each alpha set index of the alpha set indices may bemapped to a respective alpha set by a linkage. The first power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets mayindicate/comprise a first alpha set index (e.g., alpha set ID-1), of thealpha set indices, identifying the first alpha set indicating the firstpower control parameter (e.g., p0-1, alpha-1). The second power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets mayindicate/comprise a second alpha set index (e.g., alpha set ID-2), ofthe alpha set indices, identifying the second alpha set indicating thesecond power control parameter (e.g., p0-2, alpha-2). The first alphaset index and the second alpha set index may be different. The firstalpha set index and the second alpha set index may be the same.

The cell may comprise a plurality of BWPs. The plurality of BWPs maycomprise one or more uplink BWPs. The plurality of BWPs may comprise oneor more downlink BWPs. The one or more configuration parameters 1816 mayindicate the plurality of power control parameter sets on/for an uplinkBWP of the one or more uplink BWPs of the cell. The one or moreconfiguration parameters 1816 may indicate the one or more pathlossreference RS sets 1820 on/for the uplink BWP of the cell. The one ormore configuration parameters 1816 may indicate the one or more alphasets 1824 on/for the uplink BWP of the cell.

A BWP of the plurality of BWPs may be in one of an active state and aninactive state. The wireless device 1808 may monitor a downlinkchannel/signal (e.g., PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/for/via an activedownlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs. The wireless device 1808may receive a PDSCH transmission on/via the active downlink BWP. Thewireless device 1808 may not monitor a downlink channel/signal (e.g.,PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/for an inactive downlink BWP of the one ormore downlink BWPs. The wireless device 1808 may not receive a PDSCHtransmission on/via the inactive downlink BWP. The wireless device 1804may send (e.g., transmit) an uplink signal/channel (e.g., PUCCH,preamble, PUSCH, PRACH, SRS, etc.) via an active uplink BWP. Thewireless device may not send (e.g., transmit) an uplink signal/channel(e.g., PUCCH, preamble, PUSCH, PRACH, SRS, etc.) via an inactive uplinkBWP.

The wireless device 1804 may activate a downlink BWP of the one or moredownlink BWPs of the cell. The activating the downlink BWP may comprisethat the wireless device 1804 sets the downlink BWP as an activedownlink BWP of the cell. The activating the downlink BWP may comprisethat the wireless device 1804 sets the downlink BWP in an active state.The activating the downlink BWP may comprise switching the downlink BWPfrom an inactive state to an active state.

The wireless device 1804 may activate an uplink BWP of the one or moreuplink BWPs of the cell. The activating the uplink BWP may comprise thatthe wireless device 1804 sets the uplink BWP as an active uplink BWP ofthe cell. The activating the uplink BWP may comprise that the wirelessdevice 1804 sets the uplink BWP in an active state. The activating theuplink BWP may comprise switching the uplink BWP from an inactive stateto an active state.

The wireless device 1804 may send (e.g., transmit) a TB on an (active)uplink BWP of an uplink carrier (e.g., NUL carrier, SUL carrier) of thecell. The TB may correspond to a PUSCH transmission (e.g., uplink data).The wireless device 1804 may be scheduled (e.g., via DCI indicating anuplink grant, via a configured uplink grant, etc.) to transmit a TB onthe (active) uplink BWP of an uplink carrier (e.g., NUL carrier, SULcarrier) of the cell. The TB may correspond to a PUSCH transmission(e.g., uplink data). The wireless device 1804 may send (e.g., transmit)the TB (e.g., corresponding to a PUSCH transmission) based on aconfigured uplink grant (e.g., configured grant type 1, configured granttype 2). The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate theconfigured uplink grant (e.g., configured grant type 1). The wirelessdevice 1804 may receive a PDCCH transmission (e.g., and/or DCI)activating the configured uplink grant (e.g., configured grant type 2).The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate one or moreuplink resources for the configured uplink grant. The PDCCH transmission(e.g., and/or the DCI) may indicate one or more uplink resources for theconfigured uplink grant. The wireless device 1804 may transmit the TBvia at least one uplink resource of the one or more uplink resources.The wireless device may transmit the TB with periodically. The one ormore configuration parameters 1812 may indicate the periodicity oftransmission of TB.

The wireless device 1804 may receive (e.g., at or after time T1) DCI1828. The DCI 1828 may schedule a transmission of the TB. The DCI maycorrespond to DCI format 0_0. The DCI 1828 may correspond to DCI format0_1. The wireless device 1808 may transmit the TB (e.g., correspondingto the PUSCH transmission) before receiving the one or more messagescomprising the plurality of power control parameter sets 1816 (e.g.before T₀). The wireless device 1804 may determine a transmission powerfor the TB based on a reference signal. The wireless device 1804 mayuse, for determining the transmission power, the reference signal (e.g.,SS/PBCH block) that is used to obtain/receive a MIB. Determining atransmission power for a TB may comprise calculating the transmissionpower for the TB.

The wireless device 1808 may send (e.g., transmit) the TB (e.g.,corresponding to the PUSCH transmission), for example, before receivingdedicated higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameters. The wireless device 1808may determine a transmission power for the TB based on a referencesignal, for example, before receiving the dedicated higher layer (e.g.,RRC) parameters. The wireless device 1808 may use, for the determiningthe transmission power, the reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) thatis used to obtain/receive MIB.

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may or may notcomprise/indicate one or more pathloss reference RS sets 1820 (e.g.,PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS in FIG. 17, PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS). Thewireless device 1804 may determine a transmission power for the TB basedon a reference signal, for example, based on the one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 not comprising/indicating the one or morepathloss reference RS sets. The wireless device 1804 may use, for thedetermining the transmission power, the reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCHblock) that is used to obtain an MIB.

The wireless device 1804 may use an RS resource from the referencesignal to determine the transmission power for the TB. The wirelessdevice 1804 may the use the reference signal as a pathloss reference RSto determine the transmission power. The determining the transmissionpower for the TB based on the reference signal may comprise calculatinga downlink pathloss estimate for the transmission power of the TB basedon (e.g., measuring) the reference signal.

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate a referencesignal power (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterreferenceSignalPower). Downlink pathloss estimate may be based on thereference signal power and the reference signal. The downlink pathlossestimate may be equal to a difference between the reference signal powerand a measured RSRP of the reference signal (e.g.,PL_(b,f,c)(q_(d))=referenceSignalPower−higher layer filtered RSRP). Thewireless device 1804 may use the downlink pathloss estimate fordetermining the transmission power. The transmission power may comprise(e.g., be equal to) the downlink pathloss estimate.

The wireless device 1804 may transmit the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 1804 maytransmit the TB with the transmission power. The wireless device 1804may transmit the TB based on the downlink pathloss estimate. Thereference signal may be for the (active) downlink BWP. The one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 may indicate the reference signal for the(active) downlink BWP of the cell. The wireless device 1804 may receivethe reference signal via the (active) downlink BWP of the cell.

The DCI (e.g., the DCI 1828) scheduling the TB may not comprise an SRIfield. The DCI 1828 may correspond to DCI format 0_0. The DCI 1828 maycorrespond to DCI format 0_1 that does not comprise the SRI field. Thewireless device 1804 may determine a value for a determined powercontrol parameter (e.g., α_(b,f,c)(j) or alpha as shown in FIG. 17;P_(O_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) or p0 as shown in FIG. 17) for the TB based on avalue of a power control parameter (e.g., alpha, p0) in an alpha setamong the one or more alpha sets 1824, for example, if the DCI 1828 doesnot comprise the SRI field. The value for the determined power controlparameter may be same as the value of the power control parameter in thealpha set. The wireless device 1804 may use/determine a value of a powercontrol parameter (e.g., alpha, p0) in an alpha set among the one ormore alpha sets 1824 to determine a transmission power of the TB.

The wireless device 1804 may reset an accumulation of a power controladjustment state (e.g., PUSCH power control adjustment state) to a value1, for example, based on the DCI 1828 not comprising the SRI field. lmay be equal to 0, 1, or any other value. j may be greater than one.

A value of the j may indicate a transmission mode. The transmission modemay be a random-access procedure, for example if j is equal to a firstvalue (e.g., 0, or any other value). The wireless device 1804 may send(e.g., transmit) a random-access preamble for the random-accessprocedure. The wireless device 1804 may transmit a TB (e.g., msg3, aPUSCH transmission) for the random-access procedure. The transmissionmode may be a PUSCH transmission for a configured uplink grant forexample, if j is equal to second value (e.g., 1, or any other value).The wireless device 1804 may transmit a TB (e.g., a PUSCH transmission)for the configured uplink grant. The transmission mode may be a PUSCHtransmission scheduled by an uplink grant in (or indicated by DCI), forexample, if j is equal to a third value (e.g., j>1, or any other value).The wireless device 1804 may transmit a TB (e.g., a PUSCH transmission)for the uplink grant.

The wireless device 1804 may determine that the one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 do not indicate/comprise at least onepower control parameter set (e.g., SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl as shown inFIG. 17). The base station 1808 may not provide, to the wireless device1804, at least one power control parameter set via the one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 (e.g., via RRC signaling). The wirelessdevice 1804 may determine a value for a determined power controlparameter (e.g., α_(b,f,c)(j) or alpha in FIG. 17;P_(O_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) or p0 in FIG. 17) for the TB based on a value ofa power control parameter (e.g., alpha, p0) in an alpha set among theone or more alpha sets 1824, for example, based on the one or moreconfiguration parameters not indicating/comprising the at least onepower control parameter set. The value for the determined power controlparameter may be the same as the value of the power control parameter inthe alpha set. The wireless device 1804 may use/determine a value of apower control parameter (e.g., alpha, p0) in an alpha set among the oneor more alpha sets to determine a transmission power of the TB, forexample, based on the one or more configuration parameters notindicating/comprising the at least one power control parameter set.

The wireless device 1804 may use a determined value (of a pathloss powerscaling factor (e.g., alpha) to determine a transmission power of theTB. The wireless device 1804 may use a determined value of a targetpower level (e.g., p0) to determine a transmission power of the TB. Thewireless device 1804 may reset an accumulation of a power controladjustment state (e.g., PUSCH power control adjustment state) to a value1, for example, based on the one or more configuration parameters 1812not indicating/comprising the at least one power control parameter set.l may be equal to 0, 1, or any other value. j may be greater than one.The wireless device 1804 may send (e.g., transmit) the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power, for example, based on thedetermining the transmission power for the TB. The wireless device 1804may transmit the TB with the determined transmission power.

The alpha set may be a first alpha set in the one or more alpha sets1824. The alpha set may be the first alpha set in a vector of the one ormore alpha sets 1824. Alpha set 3 may be the first alpha set in the oneor more alpha sets 1824, for example, if the one or more alpha sets 1824are {alpha set 3, alpha set 1, alpha set 4, alpha set 2}. Alpha set 2may the first alpha set in the one or more alpha sets, for example, ifthe one or more alpha sets 1824 are {alpha set 2, alpha set 3, alpha set1, alpha set 4}. The alpha set may be identified with a lowest (or ahighest) alpha set index among the one or more alpha set indices of theone or more alpha sets 1824.

The DCI 1828 scheduling the TB may comprise an SRI field. The SRI fieldin the DCI 1828 may indicate (or be mapped to) a power control parameterset of the plurality of power control parameter sets 1816. A value ofthe SRI field in the DCI may indicate (or be mapped to) the powercontrol parameter set (e.g., the first power control parameter set, orthe second power control parameter set) of the plurality of powercontrol parameter sets 1816 The SRI field may indicate a power controlindex of the power control parameter set. A value of the SRI field mayindicate (or be mapped to) the power control index (e.g., power controlID-1 or power control ID-2, as shown in FIG. 18, that may be provided bya higher layer parameter sri-PUSCH-PowerControlId) of the power controlparameter set.

The power control parameter set may comprise a pathloss reference RSindex (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id) indicating (or mapped to) a pathlossreference RS. The pathloss reference RS index may identify a pathlossreference RS set, of the one or more pathloss reference RS sets,indicating the pathloss reference RS. The SRI field in the DCI 1828 mayindicate (or be associated with or mapped to, via the power controlparameter set) the pathloss reference RS index of (orindicating/identifying) the pathloss reference RS set indicating thepathloss reference RS. A value of the SRI field in the DCI 1828 may bemapped to the pathloss reference RS index of the pathloss reference RSset indicating (or associated with or mapped to) the pathloss referenceRS. The power control parameter set indicated by the SRI field maycomprise the pathloss reference RS index of (or indicating/identifying)the pathloss reference RS set. The wireless device 1804 may determinethe pathloss reference RS from a value of the pathloss reference RSindex that is mapped to the SRI field in the DCI. The value of thepathloss reference RS index and the SRI field may be mapped from thepower control index of the power control parameter set.

The pathloss reference RS may be the first pathloss reference RS (e.g.,RS-1) in the first pathloss reference RS set identified by the firstpathloss reference RS index (e.g., pathloss reference RS ID-1), forexample, if a first value of the SRI field in the DCI 1828 indicates (oris mapped to) the first power control index of the first power controlparameter set. The first power control parameter set may comprise thefirst pathloss reference RS index (e.g., pathloss reference RS ID-1)indicating (or identifying or of) the first pathloss reference RS set.

The pathloss reference RS may be the second pathloss reference RS (e.g.,RS-2) in the second pathloss reference RS set identified by the secondpathloss reference RS index (e.g., pathloss reference RS ID-2), forexample, if a second value of the SRI field in the DCI indicates (or ismapped to) the second power control index of the second power controlparameter set. The second power control parameter set may comprise thesecond pathloss reference RS index (e.g., pathloss reference RS ID-2)indicating (or identifying or of) the second pathloss reference RS set.

The wireless device 1804 may determine a transmission power for the TBbased on the pathloss reference RS in (or indicated by) the pathlossreference RS set. The determining the transmission power for the TBbased on the pathloss reference RS may comprise calculating/determininga downlink pathloss estimate for the transmission power based on (e.g.,measuring) the pathloss reference RS. The wireless device 1804 maytransmit the TB based on the determined/calculated transmission power.The wireless device 1804 may transmit the TB with the transmissionpower. The wireless device 1804 may transmit the TB based on thedownlink pathloss estimate. The pathloss reference RS may be for the(active) downlink BWP. The one or more configuration parameters 1812 mayindicate the pathloss reference RS for the (active) downlink BWP of thecell. The wireless device 1804 may receive the pathloss reference RS viathe (active) downlink BWP of the cell.

The power control parameter set (e.g., indicated by the SRI field in theDCI 1828) may comprise an alpha set index (e.g., provided by a higherlayer parameter sri-P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId in FIG. 17) indicating (ormapped to) a power control parameter (e.g., p0, alpha). The alpha setindex may indicate/identify an alpha set, of the one or more alpha sets1824, indicating the power control parameter. The SRI field in the DCI1828 may indicate (or be associated with or mapped, via the powercontrol parameter set, to) the alpha set index of the alpha setindicating the power control parameter A value of the SRI field in theDCI 1828 may be mapped to the alpha set index of the alpha setindicating (or associated with or mapped to) the power controlparameter. The power control parameter set indicated by the SRI fieldmay comprise the alpha set index corresponding to the alpha set. Thewireless device 1804 may determine the power control parameter from avalue of the alpha set index that is mapped to the SRI field in the DCI1828. The value of the alpha set index and the SRI field may be mappedfrom/via the power control index of the power control parameter set.

The power control parameter may be the first power control parameter(e.g., p0-1, alpha-1) in the first alpha set identified by the firstalpha set index (e.g., alpha set ID-1), for example if a first value ofthe SRI field in the DCI 1828 indicates (or is mapped to) the firstpower control index of the first power control parameter set. The firstpower control parameter set may comprise the first alpha set index(e.g., alpha set ID-1) indicating (or identifying or of) the first alphaset.

The power control parameter may be the second power control parameter(e.g., p0-2, alpha-2) in the second alpha set identified by the secondalpha set index (e.g., alpha set ID-2), for example, if a second valueof the SRI field in the DCI 1828 indicates (or is mapped to) the secondpower control index of the second power control parameter set. Thesecond power control parameter set may comprise the second alpha setindex (e.g., alpha set ID-2) indicating (or identifying or of) thesecond alpha set.

The wireless device 1804 may determine a transmission power for the TBbased on the power control parameter (e.g., P_(O_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) orp0, α_(b,f,c)(j) or alpha) indicated by the alpha set. The wirelessdevice 1804 may use a value of the power control parameter for apathloss power scaling factor (e.g., alpha) to determine thetransmission power of the TB. The wireless device 1804 may use a valueof the power control parameter for a target power level (e.g., p0) todetermine the transmission power of the TB. The wireless device 1804 maytransmit the TB based on the determined/calculated transmission power.The wireless device 1804 may transmit the TB with the transmissionpower.

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate one or moreuplink resources on/for the cell. The one or more uplink resources maycomprise one or more PUCCH resources. The one or more uplink resourcesmay comprise one or more SRS resources. The one or more configurationparameters 1812 may indicate the one or more uplink resources on/for theuplink BWP of the cell.

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate uplinkresource indicators (e.g., indices) for the one or more uplinkresources. The uplink resource indices may be provided by a higher layerparameter (e.g., pucch-ResourceId). Each uplink resource of the one ormore uplink resources may be identified by a respective uplink resourceindex of the uplink resource indices. A first uplink resource of the oneor more uplink resources may be indicated/identified by a first uplinkresource index of the uplink resource indices. A second uplink resourceof the one or more uplink resources may be indicated/identified by asecond uplink resource index of the uplink resource indices.

The DCI 1828 scheduling the TB may be DCI format 0_0. The DCI 1828 mayor may not comprise an SRI field. The wireless device 1808 may determinethat an uplink resource (e.g., a PUCCH resource), of the one or moreuplink resources, for sending (e.g., transmitting) uplink information orfor uplink signaling (e.g., UCI, a HARQ-ACK message, an SR, CSI, SRS) isconfigured (e.g., by the one or more configuration parameters 1812)and/or activated (e.g., by a PUCCH spatial relationactivation/deactivation MAC CE) with spatial relation information (e.g.,PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, SpatialRelationInfo for SRS). The one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 may indicate (or provide) spatial relationinformation for the uplink resource. The uplink resource may have alowest (or highest) uplink resource index among the uplink resourceindices of the one or more uplink resources.

The wireless device 1804 may determine (e.g., select) an uplink resourcewith a lowest (or highest) uplink resource index among the uplinkresource indices of the one or more uplink resources. An uplink resourcewith the lowest uplink resource index may an uplink resource with aresource index 0. The one or more configuration parameters 1812 mayindicate (or provide) spatial relation information for the uplinkresource with the lowest (or highest) uplink resource index.

The spatial relation information (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo,SpatialRelationInfo for SRS) of the uplink resource (e.g., with thelowest (or highest) uplink resource index) may comprise/indicate apathloss reference RS (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterPUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id). The wireless device 1804 may determine atransmission power for an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUCCHtransmission) via/in the uplink resource based on the pathloss referenceRS. The determining the transmission power for the uplink transmissionbased on the pathloss reference RS may comprise determining/calculatinga downlink pathloss estimate for the transmission power based on (e.g.,measuring) the pathloss reference RS.

The wireless device 1804 may determine a transmission power for the TBbased on the pathloss reference RS (e.g., with the lowest (or highest)index) used for the uplink transmission (e.g., PUCCH transmission)in/via the uplink resource. The determining the transmission power forthe TB based on the pathloss reference RS may comprise calculating adownlink pathloss estimate for the transmission power based on (e.g.,measuring) the pathloss reference RS.

The wireless device 1804 may transmit the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 1804 maytransmit the TB with the transmission power. The wireless device 1804may transmit the TB based on the downlink pathloss estimate. Thepathloss reference RS may be for the (active) downlink BWP. The one ormore configuration parameters 1812 may indicate the pathloss referenceRS for the (active) downlink BWP of the cell. The wireless device 1804may receive the pathloss reference RS via the (active) downlink BWP ofthe cell.

The DCI 1828 may correspond to DCI format 0_0. The wireless device 1804may determine that an uplink resource (e.g., PUCCH resource), of the oneor more uplink resources, for transmitting uplink information and/or foruplink signaling (e.g., UCI, a HARQ-ACK message, an SR, CSI, SRS) is notconfigured (e.g., by the one or more configuration parameters 1812)and/or activated (e.g., by a PUCCH spatial relationactivation/deactivation MAC CE) with spatial relation information (e.g.,PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, SpatialRelationInfo for SRS). The wirelessdevice 1804 may determine that each uplink resource, of the one or moreuplink resources, for transmitting uplink information and/or for uplinksignaling (e.g., UCI, a HARQ-ACK message, an SR, CSI, SRS) is notconfigured (e.g., by the one or more configuration parameters) and/oractivated (e.g., by a PUCCH spatial relation activation/deactivation MACCE) with spatial relation information (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo,SpatialRelationInfo for SRS). The wireless device 1804 may determinethat the one or more configuration parameters 1812 do not indicatespatial relation information (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo,SpatialRelationInfo for SRS), for example, for the one or more uplinkresources. The wireless device 1804 may determine that a MAC CE (e.g.,PUCCH spatial relation activation/deactivation MAC CE) indicatingspatial relation information (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo,SpatialRelationInfo for SRS) for the one or more uplink resources hasnot been received at the wireless device 1804. The wireless device 1804may determine that the one or more configuration parameters 1812 do notindicate spatial relation information (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo,SpatialRelationInfo for SRS), for example, for each uplink resource ofthe one or more uplink resources. The wireless device 1804 maydetermine/select a pathloss reference RS set among the one or morepathloss reference RS sets 1820, based on the determining.

The DCI 1828 may correspond to DCI format 0_1. The wireless device 1804may determine that the DCI 1828 does not comprise an SRI field. Thewireless device 1804 may determine/select a pathloss reference RS setamong the one or more pathloss reference RS sets.

The wireless device 1804 may determine that the one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 do not indicate/comprise at least onepower control parameter set (e.g., SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl). The wirelessdevice may determine/select a pathloss reference RS set among the one ormore pathloss reference RS sets, for example, based on the determining.

The determining/selecting the pathloss reference RS set among the one ormore pathloss reference RS sets 1820 may comprise determining/selectingthe pathloss reference RS set, among the one or more pathloss referenceRS sets 1820, with (or indicated/identified by) a pathloss reference RSindex that is equal to zero (or any other value). Thedetermining/selecting the pathloss reference RS set among the one ormore pathloss reference RS sets 1820 may comprise determining/selectingthe pathloss reference RS set with a lowest (or highest) pathlossreference RS index among the one or more pathloss reference RS indicesof the one or more pathloss reference RS sets 1820. The pathlossreference RS set may indicate/comprise a pathloss reference RS (or anindex of the pathloss reference RS). The wireless device 1804 maydetermine a transmission power for the TB based on the pathlossreference RS corresponding to the determined/selected pathloss referenceRS set. The determining the transmission power for the TB based on thepathloss reference RS may comprise determining/calculating a downlinkpathloss estimate for the transmission power based on (e.g., measuring)the pathloss reference RS.

The wireless device 1804 may send (e.g., transmit) the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 1804 maysend (e.g., transmit) the TB with the transmission power. The wirelessdevice 1804 may transmit the TB based on the downlink pathloss estimate.

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may or may not indicate areference cell (e.g., via a higher layer parameterpathlossReferenceLinking) for the cell. The pathloss reference RS may betransmitted on/via the cell, for example, if the one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 do not indicate a reference cell. The basestation 1808 may transmit the pathloss reference RS on/via the cell, forexample, if the one or more configuration parameters 1812 do notindicate a reference cell. The base station 1808 may configure thepathloss reference RS for the cell, for example, if the one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 do not indicate a reference cell. The oneor more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate the pathlossreference RS for the cell, for example, if the one or more configurationparameters 1812 do not indicate a reference cell. An RS resource for thepathloss reference RS may be on the cell.

The one or more configuration parameters 1812 may indicate a referencecell (e.g., via a higher layer parameter pathlossReferenceLinking) forthe cell. The reference cell may be different from the cell. Thereference cell may be same as the cell. The pathloss reference RS may betransmitted on/via the reference cell, for example, based on the one ormore configuration parameters 1812 indicating the reference cell for thecell. The base station 1808 may transmit the pathloss reference RSon/via the reference cell, for example, based on the one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 indicating the reference cell for thecell. The base station 1808 may configure the pathloss reference RS forthe reference cell, for example, based on the one or more configurationparameters 1812 indicating the reference cell for the cell. The one ormore configuration parameters 1812 may indicate the pathloss referenceRS for the reference cell, for example, based on the one or moreconfiguration parameters 1812 indicating the reference cell for thecell. The reference cell may be for a pathloss estimation for the cell.The wireless device 1804 may measure the pathloss reference RS of thereference cell for the pathloss estimation of the cell. An RS resourcefor the pathloss reference RS may be on the reference cell. A value ofthe higher layer parameter pathlossReferenceLinking may indicate thereference cell.

Transmitting the TB on the (active) uplink BWP of an uplink carrier(e.g., NUL carrier, SUL) of the cell may comprise transmitting the TB,on the (active) uplink BWP of the uplink carrier of the cell, with thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 1804 maytransmit the TB, on the (active) uplink BWP of the uplink carrier of thecell, based on the determined/calculated transmission power. Thewireless device 1804 may transmit the TB, on the (active) uplink BWP ofthe uplink carrier of the cell, with the determined transmission power.

A wireless device may receive information (e.g., DCI) scheduling anuplink transmission (e.g., a PUSCH transmission). DCI may comprise anSRI field that may indicate (or be mapped to) a pathloss reference RS tobe used for determining transmission power for the uplink transmission.For example, the wireless device may use an indication in the SRI fieldto determine/select a pathloss reference RS among configured pathlossreference RSs (e.g., a total quantity of pathloss reference RSs (e.g.,64 or any other second quantity) or a subset of the pathloss referenceRSs (e.g., 4 or any other first quantity)). In some types of wirelesscommunications (e.g., compatible with 3GPP Release 16, earlier/later3GPP releases or generations, and/or other access technology), the DCImay correspond to a DCI format that does not comprise an SRI field. Inthe absence of an indication of the SRI field, the wireless device maybe unable to determine which pathloss reference RS from among the totalquantity of pathloss reference RSs or the subset of the pathlossreference RSs (e.g., 4 or any other first quantity) should be used fordetermining transmission power, for example, if the DCI does notcomprise an SRI field.

Various examples herein describe enhanced pathloss reference RSdetermination, for example, if a wireless device receives DCI that doesnot comprise an SRI field. The wireless device may use a reference RSindicated by a power control parameter set corresponding to a particularindicator/index (e.g., index 0, or any other index value). Theparticular indicator/index may be known (e.g., preconfigured, set by apredetermined rule, etc.) by both the wireless device and a base stationin advance of receiving and sending, respectively, the DCI that does notcomprise an SRI field. Selection of a pathloss reference RS as describedherein may provide advantages such as improved power control signaling,reduced uplink overhead/retransmissions, reduced interference, reducedwireless device and/or base station battery/power consumption, and/orreduced delay/latency of communication.

FIG. 19 shows an example communications for transmission power control.A base station 1908 may send, to a wireless device 1904, power controlparameter sets, each set comprising parameters for determiningtransmission power (e.g., for a PUSCH transmission) at the wirelessdevice. The base station 1908 may send, to the wireless device 1904, amessage activating specific power control parameters sets. The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine the transmission power based on a powercontrol parameter among the activated power control parameters. Thewireless device 1904 and/or the base station 1908 may perform one ormore operations described above with reference to the wireless device1804 and/or the base station 1808, as described above with reference toFIG. 18.

The wireless device 1904 may receive (e.g., at or after time T₀) one ormore messages. The wireless device 1904 may receive the one or moremessages from the base station 1908. The one or more messages maycomprise one or more configuration parameters 1912. The one or moreconfiguration parameters 1912 may comprise/indicate a plurality of powercontrol parameter sets 1916 (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterSRI-PUSCH-PowerControl). The plurality of power control parameters sets1916 may comprise a first power control parameter set, a second powercontrol parameter set, a third power control parameter set, and a fourthpower control parameter set. The plurality of power control parametersets 1916 may be (e.g., may be configured) for PUSCH transmission via/ofa cell.

The wireless device may receive (e.g., at or after time T₁) a MAC CE1920 activating at least one power control parameter set (e.g., thefirst power control parameter set and/or the third power controlparameter set) of the plurality of power control parameter sets 1916.The activating the at least one power control parameter set may compriseactivating pathloss reference RS(s) associated with the at least onepower control parameter set. The MAC CE 1920 may have a respective fieldindicating each power control parameter set in the at least one powercontrol parameter set. The MAC CE 1920 may have a field indicating apower control index of a power control parameter set in the at least onepower control parameter set. The MAC CE 1920 may have field(s)indicating respective power control indices of power control parametersets in the at least one power control parameter set. The MAC CE 1920may have a field indicating at least one power control index of the atleast one power control parameter set. The field may be set to a value(e.g., one, or any other value) indicating activation of the at leastone power control parameter set. The wireless device 1904 may activatethe at least one power control parameter set, for example, based on thefield indicating the at least one power control parameter set. Thewireless device 1904 may map the at least one power control parameterset to at least one codepoint, for example, based on the activating theat least one power control parameter set. The wireless device 1904 maymap each power control parameter set of the at least one power controlparameter set to a respective codepoint of the at least one codepoint.The at least one codepoint may be of (or may be in) DCI comprising anSRI field. The SRI field in the DCI may indicate (or be equal to or bemapped to) a codepoint of the at least one codepoint. The at least onepower control parameter set may comprise the first power controlparameter set and the third power control parameter set. The wirelessdevice 1904 may map the first power control parameter set to a firstcodepoint (e.g., 0) of the at least one codepoint. The wireless device1904 may map the second power control parameter set to a secondcodepoint (e.g., 1) of the at least one codepoint.

The wireless device 1904 may receive (e.g., after time T₁, or at orafter time T₂) DCI 1924. The DCI 1924 may schedule a transmission of aTB (e.g., a PUSCH transmission). The DCI 1924 may correspond to DCIformat 0_0, DCI format 0_1, or any other DCI format. The DCI 1924 mayschedule the transmission of the TB on an (active) uplink BWP of anuplink carrier (e.g., NUL carrier, SUL carrier) of the cell.

The wireless device 1904 may receive the DCI 1924 scheduling thetransmission of the TB, for example, after receiving (or activating) theMAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter set(e.g., after time T₁, or at or after time T₂). The DCI 1924 may schedulethe transmission of the TB in a slot. The wireless device 1904 may send(e.g., transmit) the TB in the slot. The wireless device 1904 maydetermine that the slot occurs after a second slot via which the MAC CE1920 is received or in which the MAC CE is activated. The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine that the slot is after than a second slot viawhich the MAC CE 1920 is received or in which the MAC CE is activated.The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB, for example, afterreceiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920. The wireless device 1904 maydetermine a transmission power for the TB based on a power controlparameter set of the at least one power control parameter set, forexample, if the wireless device sends/transmits the TB after receiving(or activating) the MAC CE.

A PDSCH transmission may carry/comprise the MAC CE 1920. The wirelessdevice 1904 may send (e.g., transmit) a HARQ-ACK message (e.g., ACKmessage, NACK message), for the PDSCH transmission, at a first timeslot. The wireless device 1904 may apply the MAC CE 1920 at a secondtime (or starting from a second time), for example, based on thetransmitting the HARQ-ACK message. The second time may be after anoffset following the first time slot (e.g., 3N_(slot) ^(subframe,μ)+1).The offset may be based on a subcarrier spacing (or numerology, e.g., 15kHz, 30 kHz, etc.). The offset may be fixed (e.g., 3 ms, 5 ms, 2 slots,3 slots, etc.). The wireless device 1904 may activate the MAC CE 1920 atthe second time. The activating the MAC CE 1920 in the second time maycomprise applying the MAC CE 1920 at the second time (or starting fromthe second time). The activating the MAC CE 1920 at the second time maycomprise applying one or more assumptions/actions for an SRStransmission of the SRS resource set at the second time, for example, ifthe MAC CE 1920 is an SP SRS activation/deactivation MAC CE for an SRSresource set.

The DCI 1924 may or may not comprise an SRI field. The SRI field in theDCI 1924 may indicate (or be mapped to) a power control parameter set ofthe at least one power control parameter set. A value of the SRI fieldin the DCI 1924 may indicate (or be mapped to) a power control parameterset (e.g., first power control parameter set, or third power controlparameter set) of the at least one power control parameter set. The SRIfield may indicate a codepoint (e.g., 0 or 1) of the power controlparameter set. A value of the SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to)the codepoint of the power control parameter set. A value of the SRIfield may indicate (or be mapped to) the codepoint of the power controlparameter set. The power control parameter set may comprise a pathlossreference RS index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id) indicating (or mapped to) a pathlossreference RS. The pathloss reference RS index may indicate/identify apathloss reference RS set, of one or more pathloss reference RS sets(e.g., indicated by the one or more configuration parameters 1912),indicating the pathloss reference RS. The wireless device 1904 maydetermine a transmission power for the TB based on the pathlossreference RS. The determining the transmission power for the TB based onthe pathloss reference RS may comprise determining/calculating adownlink pathloss estimate for the transmission power based on (e.g.,measuring) the pathloss reference RS.

The wireless device 1904 may select a pathloss reference RS in a manneras described above with reference to FIG. 18, for example, if the DCI1924 does not comprise an SRI field. The wireless device 1904 mayselect/determine a power control parameter set, among the plurality ofpower control parameter sets 1916 or the at least one power controlparameter set, to determine/calculate a transmission power for the TB,for example, based on receiving the DCI 1924 that does not comprise anSRI field.

The wireless device 1904 may send (e.g., transmit) the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 1904 maysend/transmit the TB with the transmission power. The wireless device1904 may send/transmit the TB based on the downlink pathloss estimate.

The wireless device 1904 may receive DCI scheduling the transmission ofthe TB, for example, before receiving the MAC CE 1920 activating the atleast one power control parameter set (e.g., between T₀ and T₁, orbefore T₁). The wireless device 1904 may receive the DCI scheduling thetransmission of the TB before activating the MAC CE 1920. The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine that the receiving the DCI scheduling thetransmission of the TB occurs before receiving (or activating) the MACCE activating the at least one power control parameter set. The wirelessdevice 1904 may select/determine a power control parameter set, amongthe plurality of power control parameter sets 1916, todetermine/calculate a transmission power for the TB, for example, basedon the determining.

The DCI may schedule the transmission of the TB in a slot. The wirelessdevice 1904 may send/transmit the TB in the slot. The wireless device1904 may determine that the slot occurs before a second slot in whichthe MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter setis received (or activated). The wireless device 1904 may determine thatthe slot is before a second slot in which the MAC CE 1920 activating theat least one power control parameter set is received (or activated). Thewireless device 1920 may send/transmit the TB before receiving (oractivating) the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power controlparameter set (e.g., between T0 and T1, or before T1). The DCI 1924 mayschedule the transmission of the TB in the slot that is earlier than (orbefore) a slot in which the wireless device 1904 receives (or activates)the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter set.The wireless device 1904 may select/determine a power control parameterset, among the plurality of power control parameter sets 1916, todetermine/calculate a transmission power for the TB, for example, basedon determining that the slot occurs before a second slot in which theMAC CE 1920 is received (or activated).

The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB (e.g., a PUSCHtransmission) based on (or for) a configured uplink grant (e.g.,configured grant type 1, configured grant type 2). The wireless device1904 may send/transmit the TB, for the configured uplink grant, in aslot. The wireless device 1904 may determine that the slot occurs beforea second slot in which the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one powercontrol parameter set is received (or activated). The wireless device1904 may determine that the slot is earlier than a second slot in whichthe MAC CE 1904 activating the at least one power control parameter setis received (or activated). The wireless device 1904 may send/transmitthe TB before receiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920 activating theat least one power control parameter set (e.g., between T₀ and T₁, orbefore T₁). The slot for the transmission of the TB for the configureduplink grant is earlier than (or before) a slot in which the MAC CE 1920is received (or activated). The wireless device 1904 mayselect/determine a power control parameter set, among the plurality ofpower control parameter sets 1916, to determine/calculate a transmissionpower for the TB, for example, based on determining that the slot occursbefore a second slot in which the MAC CE 1920 is received (oractivated).

The selected/determined power control parameter set may comprise apathloss reference RS index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id) indicating (or mapped to) a pathlossreference RS. The pathloss reference RS index may indicate/identify apathloss reference RS set, of the one or more pathloss reference RSsets, indicating the pathloss reference RS. The wireless device 1904 maydetermine/calculate the transmission power for the TB based on thepathloss reference RS.

The selected/determined power control parameter set may comprise analpha set index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersri-P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId) indicating (or mapped to) a power controlparameter (e.g., target power level (p0), pathloss scaling factor(alpha). The alpha set index may identify an alpha set, of the one ormore alpha sets, indicating the power control parameter (e.g.,α_(b,f,c)(j) or alpha; and/or P_(O_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) or p0). Thewireless device 1904 may determine/calculate the transmission power forthe TB based on a value for the power control parameter. The wirelessdevice 1904 may use the value for the power control parameter for apathloss power scaling factor (e.g., alpha) to determine a transmissionpower of the TB. The wireless device 1904 may use the value for thepower control parameter for a target power level (e.g., p0) to determinea transmission power of the TB.

The wireless device 1904 may transmit the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 1904 maytransmit the TB with the transmission power. The selecting/determiningthe power control parameter set among the plurality of power controlparameter sets 1916 may be based on power control indices (e.g.,indicated by the one or more configuration parameters, and/or providedby a higher layer parameter SRI-PUSCH-PowerControlId) for the pluralityof power control parameter sets 1916. The wireless device 1904 maydetermine/select the power control parameter set with a lowest (orhighest) power control index among the power control indices of theplurality of power control parameter sets 1916. The base station 1908may advantageously map a lowest (or highest) power control index to apower control parameter set with an optimal pathloss reference RS (e.g.,a pathloss reference RS that is in a direction of the wireless device1904). The power control parameter set with a lowest power control indexmay correspond to a power control index of zero. The plurality of powercontrol parameter sets 1916 may comprise a first power control parameterset identified by a first power control index and a second power controlparameter set indicated/identified by a second power control index. Thedetermining/selecting the power control parameter set among the firstpower control parameter set and the second power control parameter setmay be based on the first power control index and the second powercontrol index. The wireless device 1904 may determine/select the powercontrol parameter set with a lowest (or highest) power control indexamong the first power control index and the second power control index.

The first power control index may be lower than the second power controlindex. The wireless device 1904 may select/determine the first powercontrol parameter set as the (selected/determined) power controlparameter set, for example, based on the first power control index beinglower than the second power control index. The wireless device 1904 mayselect/determine the second power control parameter set as the(selected/determined) power control parameter set, for example, based onthe first power control index being lower than the second power controlindex.

The first power control index may be higher than the second powercontrol index. The wireless device 1904 may select/determine the firstpower control parameter set as the (selected/determined) power controlparameter set, for example, based on the first power control index beinghigher than the second power control index. The wireless device 1904 mayselect/determine the second power control parameter set as the(selected/determined) power control parameter set, for example, based onthe first power control index being higher than the second power controlindex.

The selecting/determining the power control parameter set among theplurality of power control parameter sets 1916 may be based on the powercontrol indices (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterSRI-PUSCH-PowerControlId) for the plurality of power control parametersets 1916. The wireless device 1904 may determine/select the powercontrol parameter set with a power control index, among the powercontrol indices, that is equal to a particular value (e.g., zero, or anyother value). The wireless device 1904 may determine/select the powercontrol parameter set with a power control index, among the powercontrol indices of the plurality of power control parameter sets 1916,that is equal to the particular value. The value may be preconfigured.The value may be fixed. The value may be configured by the base station1908. The one or more configuration parameters 1912 may indicate thevalue. The base station 1908 may advantageously map the particular powercontrol index value to a power control parameter set with an optimalpathloss reference RS (e.g., a pathloss reference RS that is in adirection of the wireless device 1904).

The first power control index may be equal to the particular value(e.g., zero, or any other value). The second power control index may bedifferent from the particular value. The wireless device 1904 mayselect/determine the first power control parameter set as the(selected/determined) power control parameter set, for example, based onthe first power control index being equal to the value.

The second power control index may be equal to the particular value(e.g., zero, or any other value). The first power control index may bedifferent from the particular value. The wireless device 1904 mayselect/determine the second power control parameter set as the(selected/determined) power control parameter set.

The wireless device 1904 may receive the DCI scheduling the transmissionof the TB, for example, before receiving the MAC CE 1920 activating theat least one power control parameter set (e.g., between T₀ and T₁, orbefore T₁). The wireless device 1904 may receive the DCI scheduling thetransmission of the TB, for example, before activating the MAC CE 1920.The wireless device 1904 may determine that the receiving the DCIscheduling the transmission of the TB occurs before receiving (oractivating) the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power controlparameter set. The wireless device 1904 may determine/calculate atransmission power for the TB based on a reference signal, for example,based on the determining that the receiving the DCI scheduling thetransmission of the TB occurs before receiving (or activating) the MACCE 1920.

The reference signal used to determine/calculate a transmission powerfor the TB may be a reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that is usedto obtain MIB. The wireless device 1904 may use, for determiningtransmission power, the reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that isused to obtain MIB. The wireless device 1904 may use the referencesignal as a pathloss reference RS to determine the transmission power.The reference signal corresponding to the MIB may correspond to a widetransmission beam, may be frequently transmitted, and may be robustenabling the wireless device 1904 to determine the transmission power inan efficient manner and with lower error probability.

The reference signal used to determine/calculate a transmission powerfor the TB may be a reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that isused/identified in a latest/most recent random-access procedure. Thewireless device 1904 may use, for determining the transmission power,the reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that is used/identified in alatest/recent random-access procedure. The latest/recent random-accessprocedure may or may not be initiated based on receiving a PDCCH order.The latest/recent random-access procedure may or may not be initiatedbased on receiving a PDCCH order triggering a non-contention basedrandom-access procedure.

The one or more configuration parameters 1912 may indicate the referencesignal (e.g., a default downlink pathloss reference RS, SS/PBCH block).The wireless device 1904 may use, for the transmission powerdetermination, the (default) reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block)indicated by the one or more configuration parameters 1912.

The wireless device 1904 may use an RS resource from the referencesignal to determine the transmission power for the TB. The wirelessdevice 1904 may use the reference signal as a pathloss reference RS todetermine the transmission power.

The DCI may schedule the transmission of the TB in a slot. The wirelessdevice may send/transmit the TB in the slot. The wireless device 1904may determine that the slot occurs before a second slot in which the MACCE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter set isreceived (or activated). The wireless device 1904 may determine that theslot is earlier than a second slot in which the MAC CE 1920 activatingthe at least one power control parameter set is received (or activated).The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB before receiving (oractivating) the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power controlparameter set (e.g., between T₀ and T₁, or before T₁). The DCI mayschedule the transmission of the TB in the slot that is earlier than (orbefore) receiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920 activating the atleast one power control parameter set. The wireless device 1904 maydetermine/calculate a transmission power for the TB based on a referencesignal, for example, based on determining that the slot is earlier thanthe second slot.

The reference signal used to determine/calculate a transmission powerfor the TB may be a reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that is usedto obtain an MIB. The wireless device 1904 may use, for determining thetransmission power, the reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that isused to obtain an MIB. The wireless device 1904 may the use thereference signal as a pathloss reference RS to determine thetransmission power.

The reference signal used to determine/calculate a transmission powerfor the TB may be a reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that isused/identified in a latest/recent random-access procedure. The wirelessdevice 1904 may use, for determining the transmission power, thereference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that is used/identified in alatest/recent random-access procedure. The latest/recent random-accessprocedure may or may not be initiated based on receiving a PDCCH order.The latest/recent random-access procedure may or may not be initiatedbased on receiving a PDCCH order triggering a non-contention basedrandom-access procedure.

The one or more configuration parameters 1912 may indicate the referencesignal (e.g., a default downlink pathloss reference RS, SS/PBCH block).The wireless device 1904 may use, for the transmission powerdetermination, the (default) reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block)indicated by the one or more configuration parameters 1912.

The wireless device 1904 may transmit the TB (e.g., corresponding to aPUSCH transmission) based on (or for) a configured uplink grant (e.g.,configured grant type 1, configured grant Type 2). The wireless device1904 may send/transmit the TB, for the configured uplink grant, in aslot. The wireless device 1904 may determine that the slot occurs beforea second slot that the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one powercontrol parameter set is received (or activated). The wireless device1904 may determine that the slot is earlier than a second slot in whichthe MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter setis received (or activated). The wireless device 1904 may send/transmitthe TB before receiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920 activating theat least one power control parameter set (e.g., between T₀ and T₁, orbefore T₁). The slot for the transmission of the TB for the configureduplink grant is earlier than (or before) the second slot in which theMAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter set isreceived (or activated). The wireless device 1904 maydetermine/calculate a transmission power for the TB based on a referencesignal, for example, for example, based on determining that the slot isearlier than the second slot.

The reference signal used to determine/calculate a transmission powerfor the TB may be a reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that may beused to obtain an MIB. The wireless device 1904 may use, for thetransmission power determination, the reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCHblock) that is used to obtain MIB. The wireless device may the use thereference signal as a pathloss reference RS to determine thetransmission power.

The reference signal used to determine/calculate a transmission powerfor the TB may be a reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that isused/identified in a latest/recent random-access procedure. The wirelessdevice 1904 may use, for the transmission power determination, thereference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block) that is used/identified in alatest/recent random-access procedure. The latest/recent random-accessprocedure may or may not be initiated based on receiving a PDCCH order.The latest/recent random-access procedure may or may not be initiatedbased on receiving a PDCCH order triggering a non-contention basedrandom-access procedure.

The one or more configuration parameters 1912 may indicate the referencesignal (e.g., a default downlink pathloss reference RS, SS/PBCH block).The wireless device 1904 may use, for the transmission powerdetermination, the (default) reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block)indicated by the one or more configuration parameters.

The determining the transmission power for the TB based on the referencesignal may comprise calculating a downlink pathloss estimate for thetransmission power based on (e.g., measuring) the reference signal. Thewireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 1904 maysend/transmit the TB based on the downlink pathloss estimate.

The one or more configuration parameters 1912 may indicate one or moreuplink resources on/for the cell. The one or more configurationparameters 1912 may indicate uplink resource indices (e.g., provided bya higher layer parameter pucch-ResourceId) for the one or more uplinkresources. The wireless device 1904 may determine that an uplinkresource (e.g., a PUCCH resource), of the one or more uplink resources,for transmitting an uplink information/signaling (e.g., UCI, a HARQ-ACKmessage, an SR, CSI, SRS) is configured (e.g., by the one or moreconfiguration parameters 1912), activated (e.g., by a PUCCH spatialrelation activation/deactivation MAC CE), and/or provided (e.g., by theone or more configuration parameters 1912) with spatial relationinformation (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, SpatialRelationInfo forSRS). The one or more configuration parameters 1912 may indicate (orprovide) spatial relation information for the uplink resource. Theuplink resource may have a lowest (or highest) uplink resource indexamong the uplink resource indices of the one or more uplink resources.The spatial relation information (e.g., PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo,SpatialRelationInfo for SRS) of the uplink resource (e.g., with thelowest (or highest) uplink resource index) may comprise/indicate apathloss reference RS (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterPUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id). The wireless device 1904 may determine atransmission power for an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUCCHtransmission) via/in the uplink resource based on the pathloss referenceRS. The determining the transmission power for the uplink transmissionbased on the pathloss reference RS may comprise determining/calculatinga downlink pathloss estimate for the transmission power based on (e.g.,measuring) the pathloss reference RS.

The wireless device 1904 may receive the DCI scheduling the transmissionof the TB before receiving the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least onepower control parameter set (e.g., between T0 and T1, or before T1). Thewireless device 1904 may receive the DCI scheduling the transmission ofthe TB before activating the MAC CE 1920. The wireless device 1904 maydetermine that the receiving the DCI scheduling the transmission of theTB occurs before receiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920 activatingthe at least one power control parameter set. The wireless device 1904may determine a transmission power for the TB based on the pathlossreference RS used for the uplink transmission (e.g., a PUCCHtransmission) in/via the uplink resource (e.g., with the lowest orhighest uplink resource index).

The DCI may schedule the transmission of the TB in a slot. The wirelessdevice 1904 may send/transmit the TB in the slot. The wireless device1904 may determine that the slot occurs before a second slot in whichthe MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter setis received (or activated). The wireless device 1904 may determine thatthe slot is earlier than a second slot that the MAC CE 1920 activatingthe at least one power control parameter set is received (or activated).The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB before receiving (oractivating) the MAC CE activating the at least one power controlparameter set (e.g., between T₀ and T₁, or before T₁). The DCI mayschedule the transmission of the TB in the slot that is earlier than (orbefore) receiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920 activating the atleast one power control parameter set. The wireless device 1904 maydetermine a transmission power for the TB based on the pathlossreference RS used for the uplink transmission (e.g., PUCCH transmission)in/via the uplink resource (e.g., with the lowest or highest uplinkresource index), for example, based on determining that the slot occursbefore the second slot.

The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB (e.g., correspondingto a PUSCH transmission) based on (or for) a configured uplink grant(e.g., configured grant type 1, configured grant type 2). The wirelessdevice 1904 may send/transmit the TB, for the configured uplink grant,in a slot. The wireless device 1904 may determine that the slot occursbefore a second slot in which the MAC CE 1920 activating the at leastone power control parameter set is received (or activated). The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine that the slot is earlier than a second slot inwhich the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power controlparameter set is received (or activated). The wireless device 1904 maysend/transmit the TB before receiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920activating the at least one power control parameter set (e.g., betweenT₀ and T₁, or before T₁). The slot for the transmission of the TB forthe configured uplink grant is earlier than (or before) the second slotin which the wireless device receives (or activates) the MAC CE 1920activating the at least one power control parameter set. The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine a transmission power for the TB based on thepathloss reference RS used for the uplink transmission (e.g., a PUCCHtransmission) in/via the uplink resource (e.g., with the lowest orhighest uplink resource index), for example, based on determining thatthe slot is before a second slot. The determining the transmission powerfor the TB based on the pathloss reference RS may comprisedetermining/calculating a downlink pathloss estimate for thetransmission power based on (e.g., measuring) the pathloss reference RSused for the uplink transmission (e.g., a PUCCH transmission) in/via theuplink resource (e.g., with the lowest or highest uplink resourceindex).

The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 1904 maysend/transmit the TB with the transmission power. The wireless device1904 may transmit the TB based on the downlink pathloss estimate.

The one or more configuration parameters 1912 may indicate one or morepathloss reference RS sets (e.g., path loss reference RS sets 1820,provided by a higher layer parameter PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS as shownin FIG. 17). The one or more configuration parameters 1912 mayindicate/comprise pathloss reference RS indices (e.g., provided by ahigher layer parameter PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id in FIG. 17) for theone or more pathloss reference RS sets. Each pathloss reference RS setof the one or more pathloss reference RS sets may be identified by (ormay comprise) a respective pathloss reference RS index of the one ormore pathloss reference RS sets.

The wireless device 1904 may receive the DCI scheduling the transmissionof the TB, for example, before receiving the MAC CE 1920 activating theat least one power control parameter set (e.g., between T₀ and T₁, orbefore T₁). The wireless device 1904 may receive the DCI scheduling thetransmission of the TB before activating the MAC CE 1920. The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine that the receiving the DCI scheduling thetransmission of the TB occurs before receiving (or activating) the MACCE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter set. Thewireless device may determine/select a pathloss reference RS set amongthe one or more pathloss reference RS sets to determine/calculate atransmission power for the TB, for example, based on the determining.

The DCI may schedule the transmission of the TB in a slot. The wirelessdevice 1904 may send/transmit the TB in the slot. The wireless device1904 may determine that the slot occurs before a second slot in whichthe MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter setis received (or activated). The wireless device 1904 may determine thatthe slot is earlier than a second slot in which the MAC CE 1920activating the at least one power control parameter set is received (oractivated). The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB beforereceiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least onepower control parameter set (e.g., between T0 and T1, or before T1). TheDCI may schedule the transmission of the TB in the slot that is earlierthan (or before) the second slot in which the wireless device 1904receives (or activates) the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least onepower control parameter set. The wireless device may determine/select apathloss reference RS set among the one or more pathloss reference 1904RS sets to determine/calculate a transmission power for the TB, forexample, based on determining that the slot is before the second slot.

The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB (e.g., correspondingto a PUSCH transmission) based on (or for) a configured uplink grant(e.g., configured grant type 1, configured grant type 2). The wirelessdevice 1904 may send/transmit the TB, for the configured uplink grant,in a slot. The wireless device 1904 may determine that the slot occursbefore a second slot in which the MAC CE 1920 activating the at leastone power control parameter set is received (or activated). The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine that the slot is earlier than a second slot inwhich the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power controlparameter set is received (or activated). The wireless device 1904 maysend/transmit the TB before receiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920activating the at least one power control parameter set (e.g., betweenT₀ and T₁, or before T₁). The slot for the transmission of the TB forthe configured uplink grant is earlier than (or before) receiving (oractivating) the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power controlparameter set. The wireless device may determine/select a pathlossreference RS set among the one or more pathloss reference RS sets todetermine/calculate a transmission power for the TB, for example, basedon determining that the slot is before the second slot.

The determined/selected pathloss reference RS set may indicate/comprisea pathloss reference RS (and/or an index of the pathloss reference RS).The wireless device 1904 may determine/calculate a transmission powerfor the TB based on the pathloss reference RS. Thedetermining/calculating the transmission power for the TB based on thepathloss reference RS may comprise calculating a downlink pathlossestimate for the transmission power based on (e.g., measuring) thepathloss reference RS.

The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power, for example, based on theselecting/determining the pathloss reference RS set todetermine/calculate the transmission power. The wireless device 1904 maysend/transmit the TB with the transmission power. The wireless device1904 may send/transmit the TB based on the downlink pathloss estimate.

The selecting/determining the pathloss reference RS set among the one ormore pathloss reference RS sets may be based on the pathloss referenceRS indices for the one or more pathloss reference RS sets. The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine/select the pathloss reference RS set with alowest (or highest) pathloss reference RS index among the pathlossreference RS indices of the one or more pathloss reference RS sets. Theone or more pathloss reference RS sets may comprise a first pathlossreference RS set identified by a first pathloss reference RS index and asecond pathloss reference RS set indicated/identified by a secondpathloss reference RS index. The determining/selecting the pathlossreference RS set among the first pathloss reference RS set and thesecond pathloss reference RS set may be based on the first pathlossreference RS index and the second pathloss reference RS index. Thewireless device 1904 may determine/select the pathloss reference RS setwith a lowest (or highest) pathloss reference RS index among the firstpathloss reference RS index and the second pathloss reference RS index.

The first pathloss reference RS index may be lower than the secondpathloss reference RS index. The wireless device 1904 may select thefirst pathloss reference RS set as the (selected/determined) pathlossreference RS set, for example, based on the first pathloss reference RSindex being lower than the second pathloss reference RS index. Thewireless device 1904 may select the second pathloss reference RS set asthe (selected/determined) pathloss reference RS set, for example, basedon the first pathloss reference RS index being lower than the secondpathloss reference RS index.

The first pathloss reference RS index may be higher than the secondpathloss reference RS index. The wireless device 1904 may select thefirst pathloss reference RS set as the (selected/determined) pathlossreference RS set, for example, based on the first pathloss reference RSindex being higher than the second pathloss reference RS index. Thewireless device 1904 may select the second pathloss reference RS set asthe (selected/determined) pathloss reference RS set, for example, basedon the first pathloss reference RS index being higher than the secondpathloss reference RS index.

The selecting/determining the pathloss reference RS set among the one ormore pathloss reference RS sets may be based on the pathloss referenceRS indices for the one or more pathloss reference RS sets. The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine/select the pathloss reference RS set with apathloss reference RS index that is equal to a particular value (e.g.,zero, or any other value). The wireless device 1904 may determine/selectthe pathloss reference RS set with a pathloss reference RS index, amongthe pathloss reference RS indices of the one or more pathloss referenceRS sets, that is equal to the particular value. The value may be zero(or any other value). The value may be preconfigured. The value may befixed. The value may be configured by the base station. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate the value.

The first pathloss reference RS index may be equal to the value (e.g.,zero, or any other value). The second pathloss reference RS index may bedifferent from the value. The wireless device 1904 may select the firstpathloss reference RS set as the (selected/determined) pathlossreference RS set, for example, based on the first pathloss reference RSindex being equal to the value.

The second pathloss reference RS index may be equal to the value (e.g.,zero, or any other value). The first pathloss reference RS index may bedifferent from the value. The wireless device 1904 may select the secondpathloss reference RS set as the (selected/determined) pathlossreference RS set, for example, based on the second pathloss reference RSindex being equal to the value.

The one or more configuration parameters 1912 may indicate one or morealpha sets (e.g., the alpha sets 1824, provided by a higher layerparameter P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet in FIG. 17). The one or more configurationparameters 1912 may indicate one or more alpha set indices (e.g.,provided by a higher layer parameter P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId in FIG. 17) forthe one or more alpha sets.

The wireless device 1904 may receive the DCI scheduling the transmissionof the TB before receiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920 activatingthe at least one power control parameter set (e.g., between T0 and T1,or before T1). The wireless device 1904 may determine that the receivingthe DCI scheduling the transmission of the TB occurs before receiving(or activating) the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one powercontrol parameter set.

The wireless device may determine a value for a determined power controlparameter (e.g., α_(b,f,c)(j) or alpha; or P_(O_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) orp0) for the TB based on a value of a power control parameter (e.g.,alpha, p0) in an alpha set among the one or more alpha sets, forexample, based on the determining that the receiving the DCI schedulingthe transmission of the TB occurs before receiving (or activating) theMAC CE 1920. The value for the determined power control parameter andthe value of the power control parameter in the alpha set may be thesame. The wireless device 1904 may use/determine a value of a powercontrol parameter (e.g., alpha, p0) in an alpha set among the one ormore alpha sets to determine a transmission power of the TB, forexample, based on the determining that the receiving the DCI schedulingthe transmission of the TB occurs before receiving (or activating) theMAC CE 1920.

The wireless device 1904 may reset an accumulation of a power controladjustment state (e.g., PUSCH power control adjustment state) to a value1, for example, based on the determining that the receiving the DCIscheduling the transmission of the TB is before receiving (oractivating) the MAC CE 1920. l may be equal to 0, 1, or any other value.j may be greater than one (or may be equal to any other value).

The DCI may schedule the transmission of the TB in a slot. The wirelessdevice 1904 may transmit the TB in the slot. The wireless device 1904may determine that the slot occurs before a second slot in which the MACCE 1920 activating the at least one power control parameter set isreceived (or activated). The wireless device 1904 may determine that theslot is earlier than a second slot in which the MAC CE 1920 activatingthe at least one power control parameter set is received (or activated).The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB before receiving (oractivating) the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power controlparameter set (e.g., between T0 and T1, or before T1). The DCI mayschedule the transmission of the TB in the slot that is earlier than (orbefore) the second slot in which the wireless device 1904 receives (oractivates) the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power controlparameter set. The wireless device 1904 may determine a value for adetermined power control parameter (e.g., α_(b,f,c)(j) or alpha; orP_(O_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) or p0) for the TB based on a value of a powercontrol parameter (e.g., alpha, p0) in an alpha set among the one ormore alpha sets. The value for the determined power control parameterand the value of the power control parameter in the alpha set may be thesame. The wireless device 1904 may use/determine a value of a powercontrol parameter (e.g., alpha, p0) in an alpha set among the one ormore alpha sets to determine a transmission power of the TB. Thewireless device may reset an accumulation of a power control adjustmentstate (e.g., PUSCH power control adjustment state) to a value 1, forexample, based on the determining that the slot is earlier than a secondslot. l may be equal to 0, 1, or any other value. j may be greater thanone (or may be equal to any other value).

The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TB (e.g., correspondingto a PUSCH transmission) based on (or for) a configured uplink grant(e.g., configured grant type 1, configured grant type 2). The wirelessdevice 1904 may send/transmit the TB, for the configured uplink grant,in a slot. The wireless device 1904 may determine that the slot occursbefore a second slot in which the MAC CE 1920 activating the at leastone power control parameter set is received (or activated). The wirelessdevice 1904 may determine that the slot is earlier than a second slot inwhich the MAC CE 1920 activating the at least one power controlparameter set is received (or activated). The wireless device 1904 maysend/transmit the TB before receiving (or activating) the MAC CE 1920activating the at least one power control parameter set (e.g., betweenT0 and T1, or before T1). The slot for the transmission of the TB forthe configured uplink grant is earlier than (or before) the second slotin which the wireless device 1904 receives (or activates) the MAC CE1920 activating the at least one power control parameter set. Thewireless device 1904 may determine a value for a determined powercontrol parameter (e.g., α_(b,f,c)(j) or alpha; orP_(O_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) or p0) for the TB, for example, based on a valueof a power control parameter (e.g., alpha, p0) in an alpha set among theone or more alpha sets and based on determining that the slot fortransmission of the TB is earlier than (or before) the second slot. Thevalue for the determined power control parameter may be the same as thevalue of the power control parameter in the alpha set. The wirelessdevice 1904 may use/determine a value of a power control parameter(e.g., alpha, p0) in an alpha set among the one or more alpha sets todetermine a transmission power of the TB based on determining that theslot for transmission of the TB is earlier than (or before) the secondslot. The wireless device may reset an accumulation of a power controladjustment state (e.g., PUSCH power control adjustment state) to a value1, for example, based on the determining that the slot is earlier than asecond slot. l may be equal to 0, 1, or any other value. j may begreater than one (or may be any other value).

The alpha set may be a first alpha set in the one or more alpha sets.The alpha set may be the first alpha set in a vector of the one or morealpha sets. The first alpha set may be the first element in a vector ofthe one or more alpha sets. Alpha set 3 may be the first alpha set inthe one or more alphas sets, for example, if the one or more alpha setsare {alpha set 3, alpha set 1, alpha set 4, alpha set 2}. Alpha set 2may be the first alpha set in the one or more alpha sets, for example,if the one or more alpha sets are {alpha set 2, alpha set 3, alpha set1, alpha set 4}. The first alpha set may be an alpha set with a lowest(or highest) alpha set index among the one or more alpha set indices ofthe one or more alpha sets.

The wireless device 1904 may use the value for the determined powercontrol parameter for a pathloss power scaling factor (e.g., alpha) fordetermining a transmission power of the TB. The wireless device 1904 mayuse the value for the power control parameter for a target power level(e.g., p0) for determining a transmission power of the TB. The wirelessdevice 1904 may send/transmit the TB based on the determined/calculatedtransmission power. The wireless device 1904 may send/transmit the TBwith the transmission power.

FIG. 20 shows an example method for transmission power control. Thewireless device 1804 or the wireless device 1904 may perform an examplemethod 2000. At step 2004, a wireless device may receive (e.g., from abase station) one or more configuration parameters. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may comprise a plurality of power controlparameter sets (e.g., for PUSCH transmissions). At step 2008, thewireless device may receive (e.g., from the base station) DCI. The DCImay be for scheduling a TB (e.g., corresponding to the PUSCHtransmission). At step 2010, the wireless device may determine whetherthe DCI comprise an SRI field. At step 2012, the wireless device maysend (e.g., to the base station) the TB based on a power controlparameter set, among the plurality of power control sets, indicated bythe SRI field in the DCI, for example, if the DCI comprises an SRIfield. At step 2016, the wireless device may send (e.g., to the basestation) the TB based on a power control parameter set, among theplurality of power control sets, with a lowest power control index(among the plurality of power control parameter sets), for example, ifthe DCI does not comprise an SRI field. The wireless device may send theTB based on a reference RS associated with the power control parameterset with the lowest power control index.

FIG. 21 shows an example method for transmission power control. Thewireless device 1804 or the wireless device 1904 may perform an examplemethod 2100. At step 2104, a wireless device may receive (e.g., from abase station) one or more configuration parameters. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may comprise a plurality of power controlparameter sets (e.g., for PUSCH transmissions). At step 2108, thewireless device may receive (e.g., from the base station) DCI comprisingan SRI field. The DCI may be for scheduling a PUSCH transmission. TheSRI field may indicate a power control parameter set among the pluralityof power control parameter sets. At step 2110, the wireless device maydetermine whether a MAC CE activating at least one power controlparameter set was received, for example, before receiving the DCI instep 2108. At step 2112, the wireless device may send (e.g., to the basestation) the PUSCH transmission based on the power control parameterset, among the plurality of power control sets, indicated by the SRIfield in the DCI, for example, if the wireless device receives a MAC CEactivating at least one power control set, among the plurality of powercontrol parameter sets (e.g., before receiving the DCI). At step 2116,the wireless device may send (e.g., to the base station) the PUSCHtransmission based on a power control parameter set, among the pluralityof power control sets, with a lowest power control index, for example,if the wireless device does not receive a MAC CE activating at least onepower control set, among the plurality of power control parameter sets.The wireless device may send the PUSCH transmission based on a referenceRS associated with the power control parameter set with the lowest powercontrol index.

FIG. 22 shows an example method 22 for transmission power control. Thewireless device 1804 or the wireless device 1904 may perform an examplemethod 2200. At step 2204, a wireless device may receive (e.g., from abase station) one or more configuration parameters. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may comprise a plurality of power controlparameter sets (e.g., for PUSCH transmissions). At step 2208, thewireless device may receive (e.g., from the base station) DCI that mayor may not comprise an SRI field. The DCI may be for scheduling a PUSCHtransmission. The SRI field may indicate a power control parameter setamong the plurality of power control parameter sets. At step 2210, thewireless device may determine whether a MAC CE activating at least onepower control parameter set was received, for example, before receivingthe DCI in step 2008. At step 2212, the wireless device may send (e.g.,to the base station) the PUSCH transmission based on the power controlparameter set, among the plurality of power control sets, indicated bythe SRI field in the DCI, for example, if the wireless device receives(e.g., before receiving the DCI) a MAC CE activating at least one powercontrol set, among the plurality of power control parameter sets. Atstep 2216, the wireless device may send (e.g., to the base station) thePUSCH transmission based on a determined reference RS (e.g., pathlossreference RS), for example, if the wireless device does not receive(e.g., before receiving the DCI) a MAC CE activating at least one powercontrol set, among the plurality of power control parameter sets. Thedetermined reference RS may be a reference signal used to obtain an MIB.The determined reference signal may be identified/used in arandom-access procedure (e.g., a latest random-access procedure). Thedetermined reference signal may be a reference signal corresponding to alowest/highest pathloss reference RS index among configured pathlossreference RS sets. The determined reference signal may correspond to aconfigured uplink resource (e.g., a PUCCH resource) with alowest/highest index among all configured uplink resources.

The wireless device may send the PUSCH transmission based on a spatialdomain transmission filter (e.g., a transmission beam). A spatialrelation update message (e.g., a MAC CE) may indicate a reference RS.The wireless device may determine a spatial domain transmission filterbased on the reference RS. The wireless device may use the reference RSas a pathloss reference RS to determine transmission power, for example,if the wireless device does not receive (e.g., before receiving the DCIor before transmitting the PUSCH transmission) a MAC CE activating atleast one power control set, among the plurality of power controlparameter sets.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., from a base station) one or moremessages. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters maycomprise a plurality of power control parameter sets. The plurality ofpower control parameter sets may be for a PUSCH (e.g., a PUSCHtransmission). The plurality of power control parameter sets may be fora PUCCH (e.g., a PUCCH transmission).

The wireless device may receive DCI. The DCI may schedule a transmissionof a TB (e.g., a PUSCH transmission). The wireless device may receivethe DCI before receiving a MAC CE activating at least one power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets (orbefore activating the MAC CE). The wireless device may determine thatthe receiving the DCI occurs before receiving a MAC CE activating atleast one power control parameter set of the plurality of power controlparameter sets (or before activating the MAC CE). The wireless devicemay select/determine a power control parameter set, among the pluralityof power control parameter sets, to determine/calculate a transmissionpower for the TB, for example, based on the determining that thereceiving the DCI occurs before receiving the MAC CE. The wirelessdevice may select/determine a power control parameter set with a lowest(or highest) power control index among power control indices of theplurality of power control parameter sets, to determine/calculate atransmission power for the TB (e.g., as shown in FIG. 20), for example,based on the determining that the receiving the DCI occurs beforereceiving the MAC CE. The wireless device may select/determine a powercontrol parameter set, among the plurality of power control parametersets, with a power control index that is equal to a value (e.g., zero,or any other value), for example, based on the determining that thereceiving the DCI occurs before receiving the MAC CE. The wirelessdevice may determine/calculate a transmission power for the TB based ona reference signal (e.g., used to obtain MIB, used/identified in therecent/latest random-access procedure, as shown in FIG. 21), forexample, based on the determining that the receiving the DCI occursbefore receiving the MAC CE. The wireless device may determine atransmission power for the TB based on a pathloss reference RS used foran uplink transmission (e.g., a PUCCH transmission) in/via an uplinkresource with a lowest (or highest) uplink resource index among uplinkresource indices of one or more uplink resources (e.g., indicated by theone or more configuration parameters), for example, based on thedetermining that the receiving the DCI occurs before receiving the MACCE. The wireless device may determine a transmission power for the TBbased on a pathloss reference RS used for an uplink transmission (e.g.,PUCCH transmission) in/via an uplink resource, among one or more uplinkresources, with an uplink resource index that is equal to a value (e.g.,zero, or any other value), for example, based on the determining thatthe receiving the DCI occurs before receiving the MAC CE. The wirelessdevice may determine a transmission power for the TB based on a pathlossreference RS in a pathloss reference RS set with a lowest (or highest)pathloss reference RS index among one or more pathloss reference RSindices of one or more pathloss reference RS sets (e.g., indicated bythe one or more configuration parameters), for example, based on thedetermining that the receiving the DCI occurs before receiving the MACCE. The wireless device may determine a transmission power for the TBbased on a pathloss reference RS in a pathloss reference RS set, amongone or more pathloss reference RS sets, with a pathloss reference RSindex that is equal to a value (e.g., zero, or any other value), forexample, based on the determining that the receiving the DCI occursbefore receiving the MAC CE.

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the TB before receiving(or activating) a MAC CE activating at least one power control parameterset of the plurality of power control parameter sets. The wirelessdevice may determine that the transmitting the TB occurs beforereceiving (or activating) a MAC CE activating at least one power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets. Thewireless device may select/determine a power control parameter set,among the plurality of power control parameter sets, todetermine/calculate a transmission power for the TB, for example, basedon the determining. The wireless device may select/determine a powercontrol parameter set with a lowest (or highest) power control indexamong power control indices of the plurality of power control parametersets, to determine/calculate a transmission power for the TB (e.g., asshown in FIG. 20), for example, based on the determining. The wirelessdevice may select/determine a power control parameter set, among theplurality of power control parameter sets, with a power control indexthat is equal to a value (e.g., zero, or any other value), for example,based on the determining. The wireless device may determine/calculate atransmission power for the TB based on a reference signal (e.g., used toobtain MIB, used/identified in the recent/latest random-accessprocedure, as shown in FIG. 21), for example, based on the determining.The wireless device may determine a transmission power for the TB basedon a pathloss reference RS used for an uplink transmission (e.g., aPUCCH transmission) in/via an uplink resource with a lowest (or highest)uplink resource index among uplink resource indices of one or moreuplink resources (e.g., indicated by the one or more configurationparameters), for example, based on the determining. The wireless devicemay determine a transmission power for the TB based on a pathlossreference RS used for an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUCCHtransmission) in/via an uplink resource, among one or more uplinkresources, with an uplink resource index that is equal to a value (e.g.,zero, or any other value), for example, based on the determining. Thewireless device may determine a transmission power for the TB based on apathloss reference RS in a pathloss reference RS set with a lowest (orhighest) pathloss reference RS index among one or more pathlossreference RS indices of one or more pathloss reference RS sets (e.g.,indicated by the one or more configuration parameters), for example,based on the determining. The wireless device may determine atransmission power for the TB based on a pathloss reference RS in apathloss reference RS set, among one or more pathloss reference RS sets,with a pathloss reference RS index that is equal to a value (e.g., zero,or any other value), for example, based on the determining.

A TB may be scheduled to be transmitted in a slot. The slot may bebefore (or earlier in time than) a second slot that the wireless devicereceives (or activates) a MAC CE activating at least one power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets. Awireless device may determine that the slot is (or occurs) before (orearlier in time than) a second slot that the wireless device receives(or activates) a MAC CE activating at least one power control parameterset of the plurality of power control parameter sets. The wirelessdevice may select/determine a power control parameter set, among theplurality of power control parameter sets, to determine/calculate atransmission power for the TB, for example, based on the determining.The wireless device may select/determine a power control parameter setwith a lowest (or highest) power control index among power controlindices of the plurality of power control parameter sets, todetermine/calculate a transmission power for the TB (e.g., as shown inFIG. 20), for example, based on the determining. The wireless device mayselect/determine a power control parameter set, among the plurality ofpower control parameter sets, with a power control index that is equalto a value (e.g., zero, or any other value), for example, based on thedetermining. The wireless device may determine/calculate a transmissionpower for the TB based on a reference signal (e.g., used to obtain MIB,used/identified in the recent/latest random-access procedure, as shownin FIG. 21), for example, based on the determining. The wireless devicemay determine a transmission power for the TB based on a pathlossreference RS used for an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUCCHtransmission) in/via an uplink resource with a lowest (or highest)uplink resource index among uplink resource indices of one or moreuplink resources (e.g., indicated by the one or more configurationparameters), for example, based on the determining. The wireless devicemay determine a transmission power for the TB based on a pathlossreference RS used for an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUCCHtransmission) in/via an uplink resource, among one or more uplinkresources, with an uplink resource index that is equal to a value (e.g.,zero, or any other value), for example, based on the determining. Thewireless device may determine a transmission power for the TB based on apathloss reference RS in a pathloss reference RS set with a lowest (orhighest) pathloss reference RS index among one or more pathlossreference RS indices of one or more pathloss reference RS sets (e.g.,indicated by the one or more configuration parameters), for example,based on the determining. The wireless device may determine atransmission power for the TB based on a pathloss reference RS in apathloss reference RS set, among one or more pathloss reference RS sets,with a pathloss reference RS index that is equal to a value (e.g., zero,or any other value), for example, based on the determining.

The selected/determined power control parameter set may comprise apathloss reference RS index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id) indicating (or mapped to) a pathlossreference RS. The pathloss reference RS index may indicate/identify apathloss reference RS set, of one or more pathloss reference RS sets(e.g., indicated by the one or more configuration parameters),indicating the pathloss reference RS. The wireless device maydetermine/calculate the transmission power for the TB based on thepathloss reference RS. The wireless device may send/transmit the TBbased on the determined/calculated transmission power. The wirelessdevice may send/transmit the TB with the transmission power.

The DCI may comprise an SRI field. The SRI field in the DCI may indicate(or be mapped to) a power control parameter set of the at least onepower control parameter set. A value of the SRI field in the DCI mayindicate (or be mapped to) the power control parameter set of the atleast one power control parameter set.

The wireless device may determine that the receiving the DCI occurs, forexample, after receiving (or activating) a MAC CE activating at leastone power control parameter set of the plurality of power controlparameter sets. The wireless device may receive the DCI scheduling thetransmission of the TB, for example, after receiving (or activating) theMAC CE activating the at least one power control parameter set. Thewireless device may select/determine the power control parameter setindicated by the SRI field to determine/calculate a transmission powerfor the TB, for example, based on the determining.

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the TB, for example, afterreceiving (or activating) a MAC CE activating at least one power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets. Thewireless device may determine that the transmitting the TB occurs, forexample, after receiving (or activating) a MAC CE activating at leastone power control parameter set of the plurality of power controlparameter sets. The wireless device may select/determine the powercontrol parameter set indicated by the SRI field to determine/calculatea transmission power for the TB, for example, based on the determining.

The TB may be scheduled to be transmitted in a slot. The slot may beafter (or later in time than) a second slot that the wireless devicereceives (or activates) a MAC CE activating at least one power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets. Thewireless device may determine that the slot is (or occurs) after (orlater in time than) a second slot that the wireless device receives (oractivates) a MAC CE activating at least one power control parameter setof the plurality of power control parameter sets. The wireless devicemay select/determine the power control parameter set indicated by theSRI field to determine/calculate a transmission power for the TB, forexample, based on the determining.

The power control parameter set (e.g., indicated by the SRI field) maycomprise a pathloss reference RS index (e.g., provided by a higher layerparameter sri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id) indicating (or mapped to) apathloss reference RS. The pathloss reference RS index mayindicate/identify a pathloss reference RS set, of one or more pathlossreference RS sets (e.g., indicated by the one or more configurationparameters), indicating the pathloss reference RS. The wireless devicemay determine a transmission power for the TB based on the pathlossreference RS. The wireless device may send/transmit the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device maysend/transmit the TB with the transmission power.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more pathlossreference RSs. The base station may update the one or more pathlossreference RSs using RRC signaling. Updating the one or more pathlossreference RSs by the RRC signaling may increase signaling overhead. Forexample, in a high mobility environment, the base station may need tosend (e.g., transmit), to the wireless device, RRC messages (e.g., RRCreconfiguration messages) updating the one or more pathloss referenceRSs.

Updating the one or more pathloss reference RSs using RRC signaling mayresult in increased transmission power (e.g., at the wireless device).Power control parameters (e.g., corresponding to one or more pathlossreference RSs) updated by the RRC signaling may not follow dynamic beamswitching for the PUSCH transmissions. The wireless device may be unableto dynamically adjust transmission powers of the PUSCH transmissionsusing RRC signaling which may result in increased transmission powers.Increased transmission powers may increase interference at other cellsand/or wireless devices.

Spatial relation information (e.g., information correspondingto/indication of a transmitting beam) of an uplink resource (e.g., PUCCHresource, SRS resource) for a PUSCH transmission may be updated using aspatial relation update message (e.g., a MAC CE). Updating the spatialrelation information by MAC CE signaling may enable dynamic beamswitching for uplink transmissions (e.g., PUSCH transmissions).

It may be beneficial to update power control parameters (e.g., one ormore pathloss reference RSs) based on an update message (e.g., a MACCE). Updating the power control parameters using MAC CE signaling mayreduce RRC signaling overhead in a high mobility environment. The powercontrol parameters updated by the MAC CE signaling may follow dynamicbeam switching for the PUSCH transmission. The wireless device may beenabled to adjust the transmission power of the PUSCH transmissionthereby improving power efficiency among other advantages.

In some types of wireless communications (e.g., compatible with 3GPPRelease 16, earlier/later 3GPP releases or generations, and/or otheraccess technology), control information (e.g., DCI) may indicate (e.g.,via an SRI field) spatial relation information (e.g., associated with atransmission beam) and a power control parameter set to be used for anuplink transmission. A spatial relation update message may be sent(e.g., by a base station) to update the spatial relation information.There may be a time delay between updating the spatial relationinformation and updating a power control parameter set (e.g., updating apath loss reference RS indicated by the power control parameter set),during which the uplink resource and the power control parameter set maybe associated with the same SRI. The pathloss reference RS (associatedwith the power control parameter set) and the updated spatial relationinformation may be misaligned, for example, during the time delay. Thewireless device may determine a spatial transmission filter (e.g., thetransmission beam) based on the updated spatial relation information anddetermine the transmission power based on the path loss reference RS(which may not be in a same direction as the transmission beam), forexample, during the time delay. The misalignment may result ininaccurate determination of a transmission power by a wireless device.The base station may be unable to receive an uplink transmission fromthe wireless device due to inaccurate transmission power determination.

As described further herein, enhanced pathloss reference RSdetermination may be used, for example, based on a spatial relationupdate. A wireless device may use a reference RS indicated in a spatialrelation update message as a reference RS (e.g., pathloss reference RS).The wireless device may use the reference RS indicated in the spatialrelation update message, for example, during a time delay betweenreceiving the spatial relation update message and receiving a messageupdating a power control parameter set. The wireless device may updatethe power control parameter set to indicate the reference RS, forexample, based on the spatial relation update message. Using thereference RS indicated in a spatial relation update message as apathloss reference RS may enable/enhance alignment between an uplinktransmission beam and a beam used for determining uplink transmissionpower, which may result in more accurate transmission powerdetermination and/or improved efficiency in wireless communication.

FIG. 23 shows example communications for transmission power controlcomprising messaging for updating spatial relation information and/or apower control parameter set. A wireless device 2304 may use differentreference RSs based on whether spatial relation information and/or apathloss reference RS (e.g., indicated by configuration parameters in anRRC message) are updated (e.g., by a base station 2308). The wirelessdevice 2304 may use a reference RS corresponding to an updated spatialrelation information for determining a transmission power, for example,if the spatial relation information is updated and the pathlossreference RS is not updated. The wireless device 2304 may use an updatedpathloss reference RS for determining a transmission power, for example,if the spatial relation information and the pathloss reference RS areboth updated.

The wireless device 2304 may (e.g., at or after time T₀) receive, from abase station 2308, one or more messages. The one or more messages maycomprise one or more configuration parameters 2312. The one or moreconfiguration parameters 2312 may comprise/indicate a plurality of powercontrol parameter sets (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterSRI-PUSCH-PowerControl). The plurality of power control parameter setsmay be for (e.g., configured for) PUSCH transmission via/of a cell. Theplurality of power control parameter sets may be for (e.g., configuredfor) a PUCCH transmission via/of a cell. The cell may be a primary cell(PCell). The cell may be a secondary cell (SCell). The cell may be asecondary cell configured with a PUCCH (e.g., PUCCH SCell).

The one or more configuration parameters 2312 (or the plurality of powercontrol parameter sets) may indicate/comprise power control indices(e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter SRI-PUSCH-PowerControlId)for the plurality of power control parameter sets. Each power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets may beindicated/identified by (or may comprise) a respective power controlindicator/index of the power control indicators/indices. A first powercontrol parameter set of the plurality of power control parameter setsmay be identified by a first power control index of the power controlindices. A second power control parameter set of the plurality of powercontrol parameter sets may be identified by a second power control indexof the power control indices. The first power control index and thesecond power control index may be different.

The one or more configuration parameters 2312 may indicate at least oneSRS resource set (e.g., provided by higher layer parameterSRS-ResourceSet). The at least one SRS resource set may comprise one ormore SRS resources. The one or more configuration parameters 2312 maycomprise SRS resource indicators/indices (e.g., provided by a higherlayer parameter srs-ResourceId) for the one or more SRS resources. EachSRS resource of the one or more SRS resources may beindicated/identified by a respective SRS resource index of the SRSresource indices. A first SRS resource of the one or more SRS resourcesmay be indicated/identified by a first SRS resource index of the SRSresource indices. A second SRS resource of the one or more SRS resourcesmay be identified by a second SRS resource index of the SRS resourceindices.

The one or more configuration parameters 2312 may comprise/indicate oneor more power control parameter sets. Each power control parameter setmay comprise an indication of a pathloss reference RS set. The one ormore configuration parameters 2312 may indicate one or more pathlossreference RS sets (e.g., pathloss reference RSs sets 1820, provided by ahigher layer parameter PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS). The one or moreconfiguration parameters 2312 may indicate one or more pathlossreference RS indices (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id) for the one or more pathloss reference RSsets. Each pathloss reference RS set of the one or more pathlossreference RS sets may be indicated/identified by (or may comprise) arespective pathloss reference RS indicator/index of the one or morepathloss reference RS indicators/indices.

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a TB via/on an (active)uplink BWP of an uplink carrier (e.g., a NUL carrier, a SUL carrier) ofthe cell. The TB may correspond to a PUSCH transmission (e.g., uplinkdata). The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB beforereceiving (or activating) a first update message 2316 (e.g., a MAC CE))updating a spatial relation of an SRS resource of the one or more SRSresources (e.g., before T1 or between T0 and T1). The wireless device2304 may send/transmit the TB based on a configured uplink grant (e.g.,configured grant type 1, configured grant type 2). The wireless device2304 may receive DCI. The DCI may schedule a transmission of the TB. TheDCI may comprise an SRI field.

The SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to) an SRS resource (e.g., anaperiodic SRS resource, a semi-persistent SRS resource, a periodic SRSresource) of the one or more SRS resources. A value of the SRI field mayindicate (or be mapped to) the SRS resource of the one or more SRSresources. The SRI field may indicate an SRS resource indicator/index ofthe SRS resource. A value of the SRI field may indicate (or be mappedto) the SRS resource indicator/index (e.g., provided by a higher layerparameter srs-ResourceId) of the SRS resource.

The wireless device 2304 may determine that the SRS resource isconfigured with spatial relation information (e.g., provided by thehigher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo). The one or moreconfiguration parameters 2312 may indicate (or provide) the spatialrelation information for the SRS resource. The wireless device 2304 maydetermine that the SRS resource is activated/indicated with spatialrelation information (e.g., activated/indicated by SP SRSactivation/deactivation MAC CE). The wireless device 2304 may receive aMAC CE (e.g., an SP SRS activation/deactivation MAC CE) activating (orindicating a resource used for) the spatial relation information for theSRS resource.

The spatial relation information may provide/indicate a spatial setting(e.g., a beam) for an uplink transmission (e.g., a PUSCH transmission, aPUCCH transmission, an SRS transmission and/or the TB). The spatialrelation information may indicate/comprise an indicator/index of a firstreference RS (e.g., ssb-Index, csi-RS-Index, srs). The first referenceRS may be for (e.g., to determine) a spatial domain transmission filter.The wireless device 2304 may use the first reference RS (e.g., indicatedby the spatial relation information of the SRS resource) to determine aspatial domain transmission filter and/or a beam for the uplinktransmission. The one or more configuration parameters 2312 may indicatethe indicator/index of the first reference RS.

The first reference RS may be a downlink RS. The downlink RS maycomprise a SS/PBCH block. The downlink RS may comprise a CSI-RS (e.g., aperiodic CSI-RS, a semi-persistent CSI-RS, an aperiodic CSI-RS). Thedownlink RS may comprise a DM-RS (e.g., for a PDCCH reception, a PDSCHreception, etc.). The wireless device 2304 may use a spatial domainreceiving filter to receive the downlink RS. The wireless device 2304may transmit the TB with a spatial domain transmission filter that isthe same as the spatial domain receiving filter, for example, based onthe first reference RS (e.g., indicated by the spatial relationinformation) being the downlink RS. The wireless device 2304 maysend/transmit the TB with the spatial domain receiving filter, forexample, based on the first reference RS (e.g., indicated by the spatialrelation information) being the downlink RS. The wireless device 2304may send/transmit the TB based on the spatial domain receiving filter,for example, based on the first reference RS (e.g., indicated by thespatial relation info) being the downlink RS.

The first reference RS may be an uplink RS (e.g., a periodic SRS, asemi-persistent SRS, an aperiodic SRS, and/or a DM-RS). The wirelessdevice may use a spatial domain transmission filter to send/transmit theuplink RS. The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB with aspatial domain transmission filter that is the same as the spatialdomain transmission filter used to transmit the uplink RS, for example,based on the first reference RS (e.g., indicated by the spatial relationinformation) being the uplink RS. The wireless device 2304 maysend/transmit the TB based on the spatial domain transmission filterused to transmit the uplink RS, for example based on the first referenceRS (e.g., indicated by the spatial relation info) being the uplink RS.

The SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to) a power control parameterset of the plurality of power control parameter sets. A value of the SRIfield may indicate (or be mapped to) the power control parameter set ofthe plurality of power control parameter sets. The SRI field mayindicate a power control indicator/index of the power control parameterset. A value of the SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to) the powercontrol index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersri-PUSCH-PowerControlId) of the power control parameter set.

The power control parameter set may comprise a pathloss reference RSindicator/index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id) indicating (or mapped to) a firstpathloss reference RS. The pathloss reference RS index may identify apathloss reference RS set, of the one or more pathloss reference RSsets, indicating the first pathloss reference RS. The SRI field mayindicate (or associated with or mapped, via the power control parameterset, to) the pathloss reference RS index of (or identifying) thepathloss reference RS set indicating the first pathloss reference RS. Avalue of the SRI field in the DCI may be mapped to the pathlossreference RS index of the pathloss reference RS set indicating (orassociated with or mapped to) the first pathloss reference RS. The powercontrol parameter set indicated by the SRI field may comprise thepathloss reference RS index of (or indicating/identifying) the pathlossreference RS set. The wireless device 2304 may determine (e.g., step2324) the first pathloss reference RS from a value of the pathlossreference RS index that is mapped to the SRI field. The value of thepathloss reference RS index and the SRI field may be mapped from thepower control index of the power control parameter set. The firstpathloss reference RS (corresponding to the power control parameter setindicated by the SRI field) and the first reference RS (corresponding tothe spatial relation information of the SRS resource indicated by theSRI field) may be aligned (e.g., may have similar or substantiallysimilar spatial domain characteristics).

The wireless device 2304 may determine a transmission power for the TBbased on the first pathloss reference RS. The determining thetransmission power for the TB based on the first pathloss reference RSmay comprise determining/calculating a downlink pathloss estimate forthe transmission power based on (e.g., measuring) the first pathlossreference RS.

The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 2304 maysend/transmit the TB with the transmission power. The wireless devicemay send/transmit the TB based on the downlink pathloss estimate. Thewireless device 2304 and/or the base station 2308 may perform one ormore operations described above with reference to FIGS. 17-21, forexample, if sending/transmitting the TB between T₀ and T₁, or before T₁.

The wireless device may receive (e.g., at or after time T1) the firstupdate message 2316 (e.g., a MAC CE). The first update message 2316 mayupdate the spatial relation information of the SRS resource. The(updated) spatial relation information of the SRS resource may comprisea second indicator/index of a second reference RS (e.g., ssb-Index,csi-RS-Index, srs). The second reference RS may be different from thefirst reference RS. The second index may be different from the index ofthe first reference RS. The updating the spatial relation information ofthe SRS resource may comprise changing/updating the index of thereference RS, in the spatial relation information, to the second indexof the second reference RS. The updating the spatial relationinformation of the SRS resource may comprise changing/updating thereference RS, in the spatial relation information, to the secondreference RS. The one or more configuration parameters 2312 may indicatethe second index for the second reference RS.

The wireless device 2304 may send (e.g., transmit) a TB on an (active)uplink BWP of an uplink carrier (e.g., a NUL carrier, a SUL carrier) ofthe cell. The TB may correspond to a PUSCH transmission (e.g., uplinkdata). The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB, for example,after the receiving (or activating) the first update message 2316updating the spatial relation information of the SRS resource (e.g.,after T₁, or between T₁ and T₂). The wireless device 2304 maysend/transmit the TB, for example, before receiving a second updatemessage (e.g., a MAC CE, RRC reconfiguration message, etc.) updating apathloss reference RS.

The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB based on a configureduplink grant (e.g., configured grant type 1, configured grant type 2).The wireless device 2304 may receive DCI. The DCI may schedule atransmission of the TB. The DCI may have an SRI field. The SRI field mayindicate (or be mapped to) the SRS resource of the one or more SRSresources.

The spatial relation information of the SRS resource mayprovide/indicate a spatial setting for an uplink transmission (e.g., aPUSCH transmission, a PUCCH transmission, an SRS, and/or the TB). Thespatial relation information may indicate/comprise the second index ofthe second reference RS indicated/updated by the first update message2316 (e.g., at or after time T1). The second reference RS may be for(e.g., to determine) a spatial domain transmission filter. The wirelessdevice 2304 may use the second reference RS (e.g., indicated by thespatial relation information of the SRS resource) to determine a spatialdomain transmission filter. The wireless device 2304 may send/transmitthe TB (e.g., after T₁, or between T₁ and T₂) with the spatial domaintransmission filter that is the same as a spatial domainreceiving/transmitting filter used to receive/transmit the secondreference RS. The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB (e.g.,after T₁, or between T₁ and T₂) with the spatial domain transmissionfilter that is based on a spatial domain receiving/transmitting filterused to receive/transmit the second reference RS.

The SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to) the power control parameterset of the plurality of power control parameter sets. The power controlparameter set may comprise the pathloss reference RS indicator/index(e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id) indicating (or mapped to) the firstpathloss reference RS. The first pathloss reference RS (corresponding tothe power control parameter set indicated by the SRI field) and thesecond reference RS (corresponding to the spatial relation informationof the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field) may not be aligned(e.g., may have different spatial domain characteristics, correspond todifferent directions) due to the update of the spatial relationinformation caused by the first update message 2316. The wireless device2304 may inaccurately determine a transmission power for the TB, due tothe misalignment between the first pathloss reference RS and the secondreference RS, for example, if the wireless device 2304 uses the firstpathloss reference RS corresponding to the SRI field.

The wireless device 2304 may use (e.g., at step 2328) the secondreference RS as a pathloss reference RS to determine a transmissionpower. The wireless device 2304 may determine the transmission power forthe TB based on the second reference RS indicated/updated by the firstupdate message 2316. The wireless device 2304 may determine thetransmission power for the TB based on the second reference RS. Thewireless device 2304 may determine the transmission power for the TBbased on the second reference RS, for example, based on the receivingthe first update message 2316 and not receiving (and/or activating) asecond update message (e.g., MAC CE, RRC reconfiguration, etc.) updatinga pathloss reference RS. The wireless device 2304 may determine thetransmission power for the TB based on the second reference RS for atime period until a reception and/or activation of the second updatemessage (e.g., between time T₁ and time T₂). The wireless device 2304may not determine the transmission power for the TB based on the firstpathloss reference RS for a time period until the reception and/oractivation of the second update message (e.g., between time T₁ and timeT₂).

The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB based on thedetermined/calculated transmission power. The determining thetransmission power for the TB based on the second reference RS maycomprise determining/calculating a downlink pathloss estimate for thetransmission power based on (e.g., measuring) the second reference RS.The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB based on the downlinkpathloss estimate.

The wireless device 2304 may receive (and/or activate) a second updatemessage 2320 (e.g., a MAC CE, an RRC reconfiguration message, etc.), forexample, at or after time T2. The second update message 2320 may updatethe first pathloss reference RS indicated by the power control parameterset. The second update message 2320 may update the first pathlossreference RS in the pathloss reference RS set indicated by the powercontrol parameter set. A pathloss reference RS index in the powercontrol parameter set may identify the pathloss reference RS set, of theone or more pathloss reference RS sets, indicating the first pathlossreference RS. The updating the first pathloss reference RS may comprisethat the pathloss reference RS set indicates/comprises a second index ofa second pathloss reference RS. The second index may be different fromthe index of the first pathloss reference RS. The second pathlossreference RS may be different from the first pathloss reference RS. Theupdating the first pathloss reference RS may comprise changing/updatingthe index of the first pathloss reference RS in the pathloss referenceRS set to the second index of the second pathloss reference RS. Theupdating the first pathloss reference RS may comprise changing/updatingthe first pathloss reference RS in the pathloss reference RS set to thesecond pathloss reference RS.

The wireless device 2304 may send (e.g., transmit) a TB on an (active)uplink BWP of an uplink carrier (e.g., a NUL carrier, a SUL carrier) ofthe cell. The TB may correspond to a PUSCH transmission (e.g., uplinkdata). The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB, for example,after the receiving (and/or activating) the second update message 2320updating the first pathloss reference RS to the second pathlossreference RS (e.g., at or after T₂). The wireless device 2304 maysend/transmit the TB based on a configured uplink grant (e.g.,configured grant type 1, configured grant type 2).

The wireless device may receive DCI. The DCI may schedule a transmissionof the TB. The DCI may comprise an SRI field. The SRI field may indicate(or be mapped to) the SRS resource of the one or more SRS resources.

The spatial relation information of the SRS resource mayprovide/indicate a spatial setting for an uplink transmission (e.g., aPUSCH transmission, a PUCCH transmission, an SRS, and/or the TB). Thespatial relation information may indicate/comprise the second index ofthe second reference RS (e.g., as indicated/updated by the first updatemessage 2316). The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB with aspatial domain transmission filter that is the same as a spatial domainreceiving/transmitting filter used to receive/transmit the secondreference RS. The wireless device 2304 may transmit the TB with aspatial domain transmission filter that is based on a spatial domainreceiving/transmitting filter used to receive/transmit the secondreference RS.

The SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to) the power control parameterset of the plurality of power control parameter sets. The power controlparameter set may comprise a pathloss reference RS index (e.g., providedby a higher layer parameter sri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id),indicating (or mapped to) the second pathloss reference RS,indicated/updated by the second update message 2320. The pathlossreference RS index may identify the pathloss reference RS set, of theone or more pathloss reference RS sets, indicating the second pathlossreference RS. The SRI field may indicate (or be associated with or bemapped, via the power control parameter set, to) the pathloss referenceRS index of (or identifying) the pathloss reference RS set indicatingthe second pathloss reference RS. A value of the SRI field may be mappedto the pathloss reference RS index of the pathloss reference RS setindicating (or associated with or mapped to) the second pathlossreference RS. The power control parameter set indicated by the SRI fieldmay comprise the pathloss reference RS index of (orindicating/identifying) the pathloss reference RS set. The wirelessdevice 2304 may determine the second pathloss reference RS from a valueof the pathloss reference RS index that is mapped to the SRI field. Thevalue of the pathloss reference RS index and the SRI field may be mappedfrom the power control index of the power control parameter set.

The wireless device 2304 may determine a transmission power for the TBbased on the second pathloss reference RS. The determining thetransmission power for the TB based on the second pathloss reference RSmay comprise calculating a downlink pathloss estimate for thetransmission power based on (e.g., measuring) the second pathlossreference RS. The wireless device 2304 may send/transmit the TB based onthe determined/calculated transmission power. The wireless device 2304may send/transmit the TB with the transmission power. The wirelessdevice 2304 may send/transmit the TB based on the downlink pathlossestimate.

FIG. 24 shows an example method for transmission power control. Thewireless device(s) 1804, 1904, and/or 2304 may perform an example method2300. At step 2404, a wireless device may receive (e.g., from a basestation) one or more messages comprising one or more configurationparameters for a cell. The one or more configuration parameters maycomprise/indicate a plurality of power control parameter sets. The oneor more configuration parameters may indicate at least one SRS resourceset. The at least one SRS resource set may comprise one or more SRSresources.

At step 2408, the wireless device may receive (or activate) a firstupdate message (e.g., a MAC CE). The wireless device may receive thefirst update message from the base station. The first update message mayupdate spatial relation information of an SRS resource of the one ormore SRS resources.

At step 2412, the wireless device may receive (e.g., from the basestation) DCI. The DCI may schedule a transmission of a TB (e.g., a PUSCHtransmission). The DCI may comprise an SRI field. The SRI field mayindicate (or be mapped to) the SRS resource of the one or more SRSresources. A value of the SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to) theSRS resource of the one or more SRS resources. The SRI field mayindicate (or be mapped to) a power control parameter set of theplurality of power control parameter sets. The value of the SRI fieldmay indicate (or be mapped to) the power control parameter set of theplurality of power control parameter sets. The power control parameterset may be mapped to or indicate a first pathloss reference RS.

At step 2414, the wireless device may determine whether a second updatemessage updating the pathloss reference RS indicated by the powercontrol parameter set is received (or activated) or not. The determiningwhether the second update message is received or not may comprisedetermining whether the second update message is received (or activated)or not after the receiving (or activating) the first update message. Thedetermining whether the second update message is received (or activated)or not may comprise determining whether the second update message isreceived or not before the receiving the DCI. The determining whetherthe second update message is received (or activated) or not may comprisedetermining whether the second update message is received (or activated)or not before a slot in which the TB is scheduled to be transmitted. Thedetermining whether the second update message is received (or activated)or not may comprise determining whether the second update message isreceived (or activated) or not until a slot in which the TB is scheduledto be transmitted.

The wireless device may determine that the second update messageupdating the pathloss reference RS indicated by the power controlparameter set is (or has been) received (or activated). The secondupdate message may change/update the pathloss reference RS (in apathloss reference RS set mapped to the power control parameter set) toa second pathloss reference RS. At step 2416, the wireless device maydetermine a transmission power for the TB based on the second pathlossreference RS indicated/updated by the second update message, forexample, based on the determining that the second update messageupdating the pathloss reference RS indicated by the power controlparameter set is (or has been) received (or activated). The determiningthe transmission power for the TB based on the second pathloss referenceRS may comprise determining/calculating a downlink pathloss estimate forthe transmission power based on (e.g., measuring) the second pathlossreference RS. The wireless device may send/transmit the TB (e.g., to thebase station) based on the determined/calculated transmission power.

The wireless device may determine that the second update messageupdating the pathloss reference RS indicated by the power controlparameter set is not (or has not been) received (or activated). At step2420, the wireless device may determine a transmission power for the TBbased on a reference RS indicated/updated by the first update message,for example, based on the determining. The determining the transmissionpower for the TB based on the reference RS may comprisedetermining/calculating a downlink pathloss estimate for thetransmission power based on (e.g., measuring) the reference RS. Thewireless device may send/transmit the TB (e.g., to the base station)based on the determined/calculated transmission power.

The wireless device may support beam correspondence. A transmit/receive(Tx/Rx) beam correspondence at the wireless device may hold. A Tx/Rxbeam correspondence at the base station (e.g., or a TRP) may hold. Thewireless device may use a Tx/Rx beam correspondence, for example, foruplink and/or downlink transmissions.

FIG. 25 shows example communications for transmission power controlcomprising messaging for updating spatial relation information and/or apower control parameter set. A wireless device 2504 may update apathloss RS, corresponding to a power control parameter set, based onreceiving (e.g., from a base station 2508) a message updating spatialrelation information. The wireless device 2504 may update a powercontrol parameter set to indicate a reference RS corresponding toupdated spatial relation information. The wireless device 2504 may usethe reference RS to determine both transmission power and the spatialdomain transmission filter for an uplink transmission.

The wireless device 2504 may (e.g., at or after time T₀) receive, from abase station 2508, one or more messages. The one or more messages maycomprise one or more configuration parameters 2512. The wireless device2504 and/or the base station 2508 may perform one or more operationsdescribed with reference to the wireless device 2204 and/or the basestation 2208, respectively, between times T₀ and T₁.

The wireless device 2504 may receive (e.g., at or after time T1) anupdate message 2516 (e.g., a MAC CE). The update message 2516 may updatethe spatial relation information of an SRS resource, for example, in amanner as described above with reference to FIG. 23. The update message2516 may update the spatial relation information of the SRS resource toindicate a second reference RS that is different from a reference RS(e.g., as initially configured by the one or more configurationparameters 2512 or activated by a previous MAC CE, if any). The updatemessage 2516 may comprise an indication of the second reference RS.

The wireless device 2504 may change/update a pathloss reference RS in apathloss reference set indicated by (or mapped to) a power controlparameter set, for example, based on the receiving the update message2516 updating the spatial relation information of the SRS resource. Thepathloss reference RS may correspond to a first index. The power controlparameter set and the SRS resource may be associated with a same SRI.The power control parameter set may indicate (or be mapped to) thepathloss reference RS set indicating the pathloss reference RS. Apathloss reference RS index in the power control parameter set mayindicate/identify the pathloss reference RS set, of one or more pathlossreference RS sets, indicating the pathloss reference RS. Theupdating/changing the pathloss reference RS in the pathloss reference RSset may comprise that the pathloss reference RS set indicates/comprisesa second index of the second reference RS (e.g., as indicated/updated bythe update message 2516). The updating/changing the pathloss referenceRS in the pathloss reference RS set may comprise changing/updating thefirst index of the pathloss reference RS in the pathloss reference RSset to the second index of the second reference RS (e.g.,indicated/updated by the update message 2516). The updating/changing thepathloss reference RS in the pathloss reference RS set may comprisechanging/updating the pathloss reference RS in the pathloss reference RSset to the second reference RS indicated by the update message 2516.

The wireless device 2504 may receive, from the base station 2508, DCI2520 (e.g., at or after time T2). An SRI field in the DCI 2520 mayindicate (or be mapped) to the SRS resource and the power controlparameter set. A value of the SRI field in the DCI 2520 may indicate (orbe mapped to) the power control parameter set. The value of the SRIfield in the DCI 2520 may indicate (or be mapped to) the SRS resource.The SRI field may indicate a power control index of the power controlparameter set. The value of the SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to)the power control index of the power control parameter set. The SRIfield may indicate an SRS resource index of the SRS resource. The valueof the SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to) the SRS resource indexof the SRS resource. The SRS resource index and the power control indexmay be the same. The SRS resource index and the power control index maybe different. The wireless device 2504 may change/update the pathlossreference RS in the pathloss reference set indicated by (or mapped to)the power control parameter set, for example, based on the receiving theupdate message 2516 updating the spatial relation information of the SRSresource, indicated by the SRI field, to the second reference RS.

The second reference RS indicated by the update message 2516 may be adownlink RS. The downlink RS may comprise a SS/PBCH block. The downlinkRS may comprise a CSI-RS (e.g., a periodic CSI-RS, a semi-persistentCSI-RS, an aperiodic CSI-RS). The downlink RS may comprise a DM-RS(e.g., for PDCCH reception, for PDSCH reception, etc.).

The pathloss reference RS in the pathloss reference RS set and thesecond reference RS indicated by the update message 2516 may be quasico-located. The pathloss reference RS and the second reference RS may bequasi co-located with QCL TypeD. The pathloss reference RS and thesecond reference RS may be quasi co-located with a QCL type (e.g., QCLTypeD, QCL TypeA, or other QCL types).

The wireless device 2504 may send (e.g., transmit) a TB 2524 on an(active) uplink BWP of an uplink carrier (e.g., a NUL carrier, a SULcarrier) of the cell (e.g., at or time T3). The TB 2524 may correspondto a PUSCH transmission (e.g., uplink data). The wireless device 2504may send/transmit the TB 2524, for example, after the receiving (oractivating) the update message 2516 updating the spatial relationinformation of the SRS resource. The wireless device 2504 maysend/transmit the TB 2524, for example, based on receiving the DCI 2520.

The wireless device 2504 may transmit the TB 2524 based on a configureduplink grant (e.g., configured grant type 1, configured grant type 2).The DCI 2520 may schedule a transmission of the TB 2524. The DCI 2520may comprise an SRI field. The SRI field may indicate (or be mapped to)the SRS resource of the one or more SRS resources. The SRI field mayindicate (or be mapped to) the power control parameter set of theplurality of power control parameter sets.

The wireless device 2504 may determine a transmission power for the TB2524 using the second reference RS, for example, based on the updatingthe pathloss reference RS, indicated by the power control parameter set,to the second reference RS indicated by the update message 2516. Thedetermining the transmission power for the TB 2524 based on the secondreference RS may comprise determining/calculating a downlink pathlossestimate for the transmission power based on (e.g., measuring) thesecond reference RS. The wireless device 2504 may send/transmit the TB2524 based on the determined/calculated transmission power (at time T₃).The wireless device 2504 may send/transmit the TB 2524 based on thedownlink pathloss estimate.

The wireless device 2504 may use the second reference RS to determine aspatial domain transmission filter. The wireless device maysend/transmit (e.g., at or after time T₃) the TB 2524 with the spatialdomain transmission filter that is the same as a spatial domainreceiving/transmitting filter used to receive/transmit the secondreference RS. The wireless device 2504 may send/transmit the TB 2524with the spatial domain transmission filter that is based on a spatialdomain receiving/transmitting filter used to receive/transmit the secondreference RS.

A wireless device may perform a downlink measurement on one or moresend/transmit (Tx) beams of a TRP. The TRP may perform an uplinkmeasurement on one or more receive (Rx) beams of the TRP. A Tx/Rx beamcorrespondence at the TRP may hold, for example, if the TRP determinesan Rx beam of the TRP for an uplink reception based on the downlinkmeasurement at the wireless device. A Tx/Rx beam correspondence at theTRP may hold when the TRP determines an Tx beam of the TRP for adownlink transmission based on the uplink measurement at the TRP.

A wireless device may perform a downlink measurement on one or more Rxbeams of the wireless device. The TRP may perform an uplink measurementon one or more Tx beams of the wireless device. The TRP may send anindication of the uplink measurement to the wireless device. A Tx/Rxbeam correspondence at the wireless device may hold, for example, if thewireless device determines a Tx beam of the wireless device for anuplink transmission based on the downlink measurement at the wirelessdevice. A Tx/Rx beam correspondence at the wireless device may hold whenthe wireless device determines an Rx beam of the wireless device for adownlink reception based on the indication of the uplink measurement.

A base station may use a Tx beam in a downlink transmission for an Rxbeam in an uplink reception, for example, if a Tx/Rx beam correspondenceholds. A wireless device may use an Rx beam in a downlink reception fora Tx beam in an uplink transmission, for example, if a Tx/Rx beamcorrespondence holds.

Separate transmit antennas and receive antennas may be used fortransmissions and receptions, respectively. The transmit antennas andthe receive antennas may not share physical antenna elements, forexample, based on the separating the transmit and receive antennas. Anangle of arrival and an angle of departure may be different, forexample, if the transmit antennas and the receive antennas do not sharephysical antenna elements. A Tx/Rx beam correspondence may not hold, forexample, if the transmit antennas and the receive antennas do not sharephysical antenna elements.

An angle of arrival and an angle of departure may be the same, forexample, if the transmit antennas and the receive antennas sharephysical antenna elements. A Tx/Rx beam correspondence may hold, forexample, if the angle of arrival and the angle of departure aredifferent.

A Tx/Rx beam correspondence may require a calibration of an antennaarray at a wireless device. Some UEs may not use the Tx/Rx beamcorrespondence because the calibration of the antenna array may bedifficult to achieve. A capability indication or a signaling mechanismmay be needed to differentiate wireless devices that may use the Tx/Rxbeam correspondence (and can skip UL beam sweeping) and wireless devicesthat may not use the Tx/Rx beam correspondence. A wireless device maysend (e.g., transmit), to a TRP (or a base station), a capabilityindication of a Tx/Rx beam correspondence at the wireless device. Thewireless device may report the capability indication of the Tx/Rx beamcorrespondence to the TRP, for example, during an initial access stage.

FIG. 26 shows an example method for updating a power control parameterset. The wireless device(s) 1804, 1904, 2304, and/or 2504 (and/or anyother wireless device described herein) may perform an example method2600. At step 2604, a wireless device may receive (e.g., from a basestation) one or more messages comprising one or more configurationparameters for a cell. The one or more configuration parameters maycomprise/indicate a plurality of power control parameter sets. The oneor more configuration parameters may indicate at least one SRS resourceset. The at least one SRS resource set may comprise one or more SRSresources.

At step 2608, the wireless device may receive (or activate) an updatemessage (e.g., a MAC CE). The wireless device may receive the updatemessage from the base station. The update message may update spatialrelation information of an SRS resource of the one or more SRSresources. The spatial relation information may be updated to indicate anew reference RS.

At step 2612, the wireless device may determine a power controlparameter set, among the plurality of power control parameter sets, thatis indicated by a same index/indicator as the SRS resource. The powercontrol parameter set and the SRS resource may be associated with a sameSRI. At step 2616, the wireless device may update a pathloss referenceRS indicated by (or mapped to) the power control parameter set to thenew reference RS. The wireless device may use the new reference RS fordetermining a transmission power of an uplink transmission.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one ormore configuration parameters indicating a plurality of power controlparameter sets for physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmissions,wherein each of the plurality of power control parameter sets is mappedto a respective power control parameter set index. The wireless devicemay receive downlink control information (DCI) scheduling transmissionof a transport block, wherein the DCI is in a format that does notcomprise a sounding reference signal resource indicator (SRI) field. Thewireless device may, based on the DCI being in a format that does notcomprise an SRI field, determine a transmission power for the transportblock based on a pathloss reference signal associated with a powercontrol parameter set indicated by a lowest power control parameter setindex of power control parameter set indexes of the plurality of powercontrol parameter sets. The wireless device may transmit the transportblock using the determined transmission power. The wireless device mayalso perform one or more additional operations. Each of the plurality ofpower control parameter sets may be associated with at least onepathloss reference signal of a plurality of pathloss reference signals.The wireless device may receive second DCI activating a configureduplink grant, wherein the second DCI is in a format that does notcomprise an SRI field. The wireless device may, based on the second DCIbeing in a format that does not comprise an SRI field, determine asecond transmission power of a second transport block for the configureduplink grant based on the pathloss reference signal. The wireless devicemay transmit the second transport block using the second transmissionpower. The wireless device may receive a message activating at least onepower control parameter set of the plurality of power control parametersets, wherein the at least one power control parameter set comprises thepower control parameter set with the lowest power control parameter setindex. The wireless device may receive a message indicating at least onepower control parameter set of the plurality of power control parametersets, wherein the receiving the DCI comprises receiving the DCI afterreceiving the message indicating the at least one power controlparameter set. The wireless device may receive second DCI schedulingtransmission of a second transport block, wherein the second DCIindicates an SRI that is mapped to a second power control parameter setof the plurality of power control parameter sets. The wireless devicemay determine a second transmission power of the second transport blockbased on a second pathloss reference signal indicated by the secondpower control parameter set. The wireless device may transmit the secondtransport block using the second transmission power. The wireless devicemay receive a message indicating at least one power control parameterset of the plurality of power control parameter sets. The wirelessdevice may, before the receiving the message, determine a defaultpathloss reference signal of a plurality of pathloss reference signalsassociated with the plurality of power control parameter sets. Thewireless device may transmit an uplink signal using a transmission powerbased on the default pathloss reference signal. The lowest power controlparameter set index may be equal to zero. The power control parameterset may comprise a path loss reference signal index indicating the pathloss reference signal. The determining the transmission power based onthe path loss reference signal may comprise determining the transmissionpower based on calculating a downlink path loss estimate of the pathloss reference signal. The one or more configuration parameters may befor the PUSCH transmissions via an uplink bandwidth part (BWP) of acell. The wireless device may activate the uplink BWP as an activeuplink BWP of the cell. The transmitting the transport block may be viathe active uplink BWP. The power control parameter set may be an SRIPUSCH power control. The one or more configuration parameters mayindicate a plurality of uplink resources, wherein each of the pluralityof uplink resources may be mapped to a respective uplink resource index.The wireless device may, based on the DCI being in the format that doesnot comprise the SRI field, determine an uplink resource with a lowestuplink resource index of uplink resource indexes of the plurality ofuplink resources. The transmitting the transport block may comprisetransmitting the transport block using the determined uplink resource.Systems, devices and media may be configured with the method. A wirelessdevice may comprise one or more processors; and memory storinginstructions that, when executed, cause the wireless device to performthe described method, additional operations and/or include theadditional elements. A system may comprise a wireless device configuredto perform the described method, additional operations and/or includethe additional elements; and a base station configured to send the DCI.A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed,cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/orinclude the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one ormore configuration parameters indicating a plurality of power controlparameter sets for physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmissions,wherein each of the plurality of power control parameter sets is mappedto a respective power control parameter set index. The wireless devicemay receive downlink control information (DCI) scheduling transmissionof a transport block, wherein the DCI is in a format that does notcomprise a sounding reference signal resource indicator (SRI) field.Based on the DCI being in a format that does not comprise an SRI field,the wireless device may determine a pathloss reference signal indicatedby a lowest power control parameter set index of power control parameterset indexes of the plurality of power control parameter sets. Thewireless device may transmit the transport block using a transmissionpower based on the pathloss reference signal. The wireless device mayalso perform one or more additional operations. The wireless device maydetermine the transmission power based on a downlink pathloss estimateof the pathloss reference signal. Each of the plurality of power controlparameter sets may be associated with at least one pathloss referencesignal of a plurality of pathloss reference signals. The wireless devicemay receive a message activating at least one power control parameterset of the plurality of power control parameter sets, wherein the atleast one power control parameter set comprises the power controlparameter set with the lowest power control parameter set index. Thewireless device may receive a message indicating at least one powercontrol parameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets,wherein the receiving the DCI comprises receiving the DCI prior toreceiving the message indicating the at least one power controlparameter set. The wireless device may receive second DCI schedulingtransmission of a second transport block, wherein the second DCIindicates an SRI that is mapped to a second power control parameter setof the plurality of power control parameter sets. The wireless devicemay determine a second transmission power of the second transport blockbased on a second pathloss reference signal indicated by the secondpower control parameter set. The wireless device may transmit the secondtransport block using the second transmission power. The lowest powercontrol parameter set index may be equal to zero. Systems, devices andmedia may be configured with the method. A wireless device may compriseone or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, whenexecuted, cause the wireless device to perform the described method,additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A systemmay comprise a wireless device configured to perform the describedmethod, additional operations and/or include the additional elements;and a base station configured to send the DCI. A computer-readablemedium may store instructions that, when executed, cause performance ofthe described method, additional operations and/or include theadditional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one ormore configuration parameters indicating a plurality of power controlparameter sets for physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmissions,wherein each of the plurality of power control parameter sets is mappedto a respective power control parameter set index. The wireless devicemay determine a default pathloss reference signal of a plurality ofpathloss reference signals, wherein each of the plurality of pathlossreference signals is associated with a respective power controlparameter set of the plurality of power control parameter sets. Thewireless device may transmit a first transport block using atransmission power based on the default pathloss reference signal. Thewireless device may receive a control message indicating at least onepower control parameter set of the plurality of power control parametersets. The wireless device may, after the receiving the control message,transmit a second transport block using a transmission power based on atleast one pathloss reference signal associated with the at least onepower control parameter set. The wireless device may also perform one ormore additional operations. The wireless device may after the receivingthe control message and before the transmitting the second transportblock, receive downlink control information (DCI) schedulingtransmission of the second transport block, wherein the DCI is in aformat that does not comprise a sounding reference signal resourceindicator (SRI) field. The wireless device may determine the at leastone pathloss reference signal based on a lowest power control parameterset index of power control parameter set indexes of the plurality ofpower control parameter sets. The default pathloss reference signal maybe indicated by a lowest power control parameter set index of powercontrol parameter set indexes of the plurality of power controlparameter sets. The lowest power control parameter set index may beequal to zero. The default pathloss reference signal may be at least oneof: a reference signal used to receive a master information block (MIB);or a reference signal used in a latest random access procedure. Systems,devices and media may be configured with the method. A wireless devicemay comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructionsthat, when executed, cause the wireless device to perform the describedmethod, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. Asystem may comprise a wireless device configured to perform thedescribed method, additional operations and/or include the additionalelements; and a base station configured to send the control message. Acomputer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed,cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/orinclude the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may receive first downlink control information (DCI)for scheduling transmission of a first transport block, wherein thefirst DCI comprises a first sounding reference signal resource indicator(SRI) field indicating a power control parameter set. The wirelessdevice may determine, based on a first reference signal mapped to thepower control parameter set, a first transmission power for a scheduledtransmission of the first transport block. The wireless device maytransmit the first transport block using the first transmission power.The wireless device may, based on receiving a medium access control(MAC) control element (CE) indicating a second reference signal, map thesecond reference signal to the power control parameter set. The wirelessdevice may receive second DCI for scheduling transmission of a secondtransport block, wherein the second DCI comprises a second SRI fieldindicating the power control parameter set. The wireless device maydetermine, based on the second reference signal, a second transmissionpower for a scheduled transmission of the second transport block. Thewireless device may transmit the second transport block using the secondtransmission power. The wireless device may also perform one or moreadditional operations. The wireless device may receive one or moremessages comprising one or more configuration parameters indicating aplurality of power control parameter sets comprising the power controlparameter set. The first SRI field may indicate a resource mapped to athird reference signal. The transmitting the first transport block maycomprise transmitting the first transport block using a spatial domaintransmission filter based on the third reference signal. Thetransmitting the second transport block may comprise transmitting thesecond transport block using a spatial domain transmission filter basedon the second reference signal. The determining the first transmissionpower may be further based on determining a downlink pathloss estimateof the first reference signal. The determining the second transmissionpower may be further based on determining a downlink pathloss estimateof the second reference signal. The mapping may comprise mapping a pathloss reference reference signal (RS) index in the power controlparameter set to a path loss reference RS that indicates the secondreference signal. The wireless device may, based on the receiving theMAC CE indicating the second reference signal, map the second referencesignal to spatial relation information associated with a soundingreference signal (SRS) resource indicated by the second SRI field. Aparameter SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl may indicate the power controlparameter set, and a parameter PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id may indicatethe second reference signal. Systems, devices and media may beconfigured with the method. A wireless device may comprise one or moreprocessors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed, causethe wireless device to perform the described method, additionaloperations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprisea wireless device configured to perform the described method, additionaloperations and/or include the additional elements; and a base stationconfigured to send the first DCI. A computer-readable medium may storeinstructions that, when executed, cause performance of the describedmethod, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may receive one or more configuration parametersindicating a plurality of power control parameter sets. The wirelessdevice may receive a medium access control (MAC) control element (CE)indicating a reference signal. The wireless device may map the referencesignal to a first power control parameter set of the plurality of powercontrol parameter sets. The wireless device may receive downlink controlinformation (DCI) for scheduling transmission of a transport block,wherein the DCI may comprise a sounding reference signal resourceindicator (SRI) field indicating the first power control parameter set.The wireless device may determine, based on the reference signal, atransmission power for a scheduled transmission of the transport block.The wireless device may transmit the transport block using thetransmission power. The wireless device may receive DCI for schedulingtransmission of an uplink signal, wherein the DCI for schedulingtransmission of the uplink signal may comprise the SRI field indicatingthe first power control parameter set. The wireless device maydetermine, based on a second reference signal mapped to the first powercontrol parameter set, a second transmission power for a scheduledtransmission of the uplink signal. The wireless device may transmit theuplink signal using the second transmission power. The transmitting thetransport block may comprise transmitting the transport block using aspatial domain transmission filter based on the reference signal. Thedetermining the transmission power may be further based on determining adownlink pathloss estimate of the reference signal. The SRI field mayindicate a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource. The wireless devicemay, based on the receiving the MAC CE indicating the reference signal,map the reference signal to spatial relation information associated witha sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicated by the SRI field. Aparameter SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl may indicate the first power controlparameter set, and a parameter PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id may indicatethe reference signal. Systems, devices and media may be configured withthe method. A wireless device may comprise one or more processors; andmemory storing instructions that, when executed, cause the wirelessdevice to perform the described method, additional operations and/orinclude the additional elements. A system may comprise a wireless deviceconfigured to perform the described method, additional operations and/orinclude the additional elements; and a base station configured to sendthe first DCI. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that,when executed, cause performance of the described method, additionaloperations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may receive a medium access control (MAC) controlelement (CE) indicating a reference signal. receiving downlink controlinformation (DCI) for scheduling transmission of a transport block,wherein the DCI comprises a sounding reference signal resource indicator(SRI) field indicating a power control parameter set. The wirelessdevice may determine a transmission power, for a scheduled transmissionof the transport block, based on: the power control parameter set; andthe reference signal. The wireless device may transmit the transportblock using the transmission power. The wireless device may also performone or more additional operations. The wireless device may receive DCIfor scheduling transmission of an uplink signal, wherein the DCI forscheduling transmission of the uplink signal may comprise the SRI fieldindicating the power control parameter set. The wireless device maydetermine, based on a second reference signal mapped to the powercontrol parameter set, a second transmission power for a scheduledtransmission of the uplink signal. The wireless device may transmit theuplink signal using the second transmission power. The wireless devicemay, based on the receiving the MAC CE indicating the reference signal,map the reference signal to the power control parameter set, wherein thedetermining the transmission power may be further based on the mapping.The transmitting the transport block may comprise transmitting thetransport block using a spatial domain transmission filter based on thereference signal. The determining the transmission power may be furtherbased on determining a downlink pathloss estimate of the referencesignal. The wireless device may, based on the receiving the MAC CEindicating the reference signal, map the reference signal to spatialrelation information associated with a sounding reference signal (SRS)resource indicated by the SRI field. A parameter SRI-PUSCH-PowerControlmay indicate the power control parameter set, and a parameterPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id may indicate the reference signal. Systems,devices and media may be configured with the method. A wireless devicemay comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructionsthat, when executed, cause the wireless device to perform the describedmethod, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. Asystem may comprise a wireless device configured to perform thedescribed method, additional operations and/or include the additionalelements; and a base station configured to send the first DCI. Acomputer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed,cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/orinclude the additional elements.

One or more of the operations described herein may be conditional. Forexample, one or more operations may be performed if certain criteria aremet, such as in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment,a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteriamay be based on one or more conditions such as wireless device and/ornetwork node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packetsizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or thelike. If the one or more criteria are met, various examples may be used.It may be possible to implement any portion of the examples describedherein in any order and based on any condition.

A base station may communicate with one or more of wireless devices.Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies,and/or multiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices mayhave some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device categoryand/or capability(ies). A base station may comprise multiple sectors,cells, and/or portions of transmission entities. A base stationcommunicating with a plurality of wireless devices may refer to a basestation communicating with a subset of the total wireless devices in acoverage area. Wireless devices referred to herein may correspond to aplurality of wireless devices compatible with a given LTE, 5G, or other3GPP or non-3GPP release with a given capability and in a given sectorof a base station. A plurality of wireless devices may refer to aselected plurality of wireless devices, a subset of total wirelessdevices in a coverage area, and/or any group of wireless devices. Suchdevices may operate, function, and/or perform based on or according todrawings and/or descriptions herein, and/or the like. There may be aplurality of base stations and/or a plurality of wireless devices in acoverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, forexample, because those wireless devices and/or base stations may performbased on older releases of LTE, 5G, or other 3GPP or non-3GPPtechnology.

One or more parameters, fields, and/or Information elements (IEs), maycomprise one or more information objects, values, and/or any otherinformation. An information object may comprise one or more otherobjects. At least some (or all) parameters, fields, IEs, and/or the likemay be used and can be interchangeable depending on the context. If ameaning or definition is given, such meaning or definition controls.

One or more elements in examples described herein may be implemented asmodules. A module may be an element that performs a defined functionand/or that has a defined interface to other elements. The modules maybe implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware,firmware, wetware (e.g., hardware with a biological element) or acombination thereof, all of which may be behaviorally equivalent. Forexample, modules may be implemented as a software routine written in acomputer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (suchas C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, Matlab or the like) or amodeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, orLab VIEWMathScript. Additionally or alternatively, it may be possible toimplement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete orprogrammable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples ofprogrammable hardware may comprise: computers, microcontrollers,microprocessors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); fieldprogrammable gate arrays (FPGAs); and/or complex programmable logicdevices (CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and/or microprocessors maybe programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like.FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware descriptionlanguages (HDL), such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) orVerilog, which may configure connections between internal hardwaremodules with lesser functionality on a programmable device. Theabove-mentioned technologies may be used in combination to achieve theresult of a functional module.

One or more features described herein may be implemented in acomputer-usable data and/or computer-executable instructions, such as inone or more program modules, executed by one or more computers or otherdevices. Generally, program modules include routines, programs, objects,components, data structures, etc. that perform particular tasks orimplement particular abstract data types when executed by a processor ina computer or other data processing device. The computer executableinstructions may be stored on one or more computer readable media suchas a hard disk, optical disk, removable storage media, solid statememory, RAM, etc. The functionality of the program modules may becombined or distributed as desired. The functionality may be implementedin whole or in part in firmware or hardware equivalents such asintegrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), and thelike. Particular data structures may be used to more effectivelyimplement one or more features described herein, and such datastructures are contemplated within the scope of computer executableinstructions and computer-usable data described herein.

A non-transitory tangible computer readable media may compriseinstructions executable by one or more processors configured to causeoperations of multi-carrier communications described herein. An articleof manufacture may comprise a non-transitory tangible computer readablemachine-accessible medium having instructions encoded thereon forenabling programmable hardware to cause a device (e.g., a wirelessdevice, wireless communicator, a wireless device, a base station, andthe like) to allow operation of multi-carrier communications describedherein. The device, or one or more devices such as in a system, mayinclude one or more processors, memory, interfaces, and/or the like.Other examples may comprise communication networks comprising devicessuch as base stations, wireless devices or user equipment (wirelessdevice), servers, switches, antennas, and/or the like. A network maycomprise any wireless technology, including but not limited to,cellular, wireless, WiFi, 4G, 5G, any generation of 3GPP or othercellular standard or recommendation, any non-3GPP network, wirelesslocal area networks, wireless personal area networks, wireless ad hocnetworks, wireless metropolitan area networks, wireless wide areanetworks, global area networks, satellite networks, space networks, andany other network using wireless communications. Any device (e.g., awireless device, a base station, or any other device) or combination ofdevices may be used to perform any combination of one or more of stepsdescribed herein, including, for example, any complementary step orsteps of one or more of the above steps.

Although examples are described above, features and/or steps of thoseexamples may be combined, divided, omitted, rearranged, revised, and/oraugmented in any desired manner Various alterations, modifications, andimprovements will readily occur to those skilled in the art. Suchalterations, modifications, and improvements are intended to be part ofthis description, though not expressly stated herein, and are intendedto be within the spirit and scope of the descriptions herein.Accordingly, the foregoing description is by way of example only, and isnot limiting.

1. A method comprising: based on a received medium access control (MAC)control element (CE) indicating a reference signal, mapping, by awireless device, the reference signal to a power control parameter set;receiving downlink control information (DCI) for scheduling transmissionof an uplink signal, wherein the DCI comprises a sounding referencesignal resource indicator (SRI) field indicating the power controlparameter set; and transmitting, based on the reference signal, theuplink signal.
 2. The method of claim 1, further comprising: receivingone or more messages comprising one or more configuration parametersindicating a plurality of power control parameter sets comprising thepower control parameter set.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein themapping comprises mapping a pathloss reference reference signal (RS)index in the power control parameter set to the reference signal.
 4. Themethod of claim 1, further comprising: based on the received MAC CEindicating the reference signal, mapping the reference signal to spatialrelation information associated with a sounding reference signal (SRS)resource indicated by the SRI field.
 5. The method of claim 1, whereinthe mapping comprises associating the reference signal to the powercontrol parameter set.
 6. The method of claim 1, further comprising:receiving second DCI for scheduling transmission of a second uplinksignal, wherein the second DCI comprises a second SRI field indicatingthe power control parameter set; determining, based on a secondreference signal mapped to the power control parameter set, a secondtransmission power for a scheduled transmission of the second uplinksignal; and transmitting the second uplink signal using the secondtransmission power.
 7. The method of claim 1, wherein the transmissionof the uplink signal comprises a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)transmission.
 8. The method of claim 1, further comprising: determining,based on the reference signal, a transmission power for a scheduledtransmission of the uplink signal, wherein the transmitting the uplinksignal comprises transmitting the uplink signal using the transmissionpower.
 9. A wireless device comprising: one or more processors; andmemory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or moreprocessors, cause the wireless device to: based on a received mediumaccess control (MAC) control element (CE) indicating a reference signal,map the reference signal to a power control parameter set; receivedownlink control information (DCI) for scheduling transmission of anuplink signal, wherein the DCI comprises a sounding reference signalresource indicator (SRI) field indicating the power control parameterset; and transmit, based on the reference signal, the uplink signal. 10.The wireless device of claim 9, wherein the instructions, when executedby the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to: receive oneor more messages comprising one or more configuration parametersindicating a plurality of power control parameter sets comprising thepower control parameter set.
 11. The wireless device of claim 9, whereinthe instructions, when executed by the one or more processors, cause thewireless device to map the reference signal by mapping a pathlossreference reference signal (RS) index in the power control parameter setto the reference signal.
 12. The wireless device of claim 9, wherein theinstructions, when executed by the one or more processors, cause thewireless device to: based on the received MAC CE indicating thereference signal, map the reference signal to spatial relationinformation associated with a sounding reference signal (SRS) resourceindicated by the SRI field.
 13. The wireless device of claim 9, whereinthe instructions, when executed by the one or more processors, cause thewireless device to map the reference signal by associating the referencesignal to the power control parameter set.
 14. The wireless device ofclaim 9, wherein the instructions, when executed by the one or moreprocessors, cause the wireless device to: receive second DCI forscheduling transmission of a second uplink signal, wherein the secondDCI comprises a second SRI field indicating the power control parameterset; determine, based on a second reference signal mapped to the powercontrol parameter set, a second transmission power for a scheduledtransmission of the second uplink signal; and transmit the second uplinksignal using the second transmission power.
 15. The wireless device ofclaim 9, wherein the transmission of the uplink signal comprises aphysical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission.
 16. The wirelessdevice of claim 9, wherein the instructions, when executed by the one ormore processors, cause the wireless device to: determine, based on thereference signal, a transmission power for a scheduled transmission ofthe uplink signal; and transmit the uplink signal by transmitting theuplink signal using the transmission power.
 17. A non-transitorycomputer-readable medium storing instructions that, when executed, causea wireless device to: based on a received medium access control (MAC)control element (CE) indicating a reference signal, map the referencesignal to a power control parameter set; receive downlink controlinformation (DCI) for scheduling transmission of an uplink signal,wherein the DCI comprises a sounding reference signal resource indicator(SRI) field indicating the power control parameter set; and transmit,based on the reference signal, the uplink signal.
 18. The non-transitorycomputer-readable medium of claim 17, wherein the instructions, whenexecuted, cause the wireless device to: receive one or more messagescomprising one or more configuration parameters indicating a pluralityof power control parameter sets comprising the power control parameterset.
 19. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of claim 17,wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the wireless device tomap the reference signal by mapping a pathloss reference referencesignal (RS) index in the power control parameter set to the referencesignal.
 20. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of claim 17,wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the wireless device to:based on the received MAC CE indicating the reference signal, map thereference signal to spatial relation information associated with asounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicated by the SRI field. 21.The non-transitory computer-readable medium of claim 17, wherein theinstructions, when executed, cause the wireless device to map thereference signal by associating the reference signal to the powercontrol parameter set.
 22. The non-transitory computer-readable mediumof claim 17, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the wirelessdevice to: receive second DCI for scheduling transmission of a seconduplink signal, wherein the second DCI comprises a second SRI fieldindicating the power control parameter set; determine, based on a secondreference signal mapped to the power control parameter set, a secondtransmission power for a scheduled transmission of the second uplinksignal; and transmit the second uplink signal using the secondtransmission power.
 23. The non-transitory computer-readable medium ofclaim 17, wherein the transmission of the uplink signal comprises aphysical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission.
 24. Thenon-transitory computer-readable medium of claim 17, wherein theinstructions, when executed, cause the wireless device to: determine,based on the reference signal, a transmission power for a scheduledtransmission of the uplink signal; and transmit the uplink signal bytransmitting the uplink signal using the transmission power.